WO2012032745A1 - Display device, display panel, display module, image display system, and image display method - Google Patents

Display device, display panel, display module, image display system, and image display method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2012032745A1
WO2012032745A1 PCT/JP2011/004910 JP2011004910W WO2012032745A1 WO 2012032745 A1 WO2012032745 A1 WO 2012032745A1 JP 2011004910 W JP2011004910 W JP 2011004910W WO 2012032745 A1 WO2012032745 A1 WO 2012032745A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
light
display
liquid crystal
display area
image
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2011/004910
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
裕志 吉田
千幸 神徳
Original Assignee
シャープ株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by シャープ株式会社 filed Critical シャープ株式会社
Publication of WO2012032745A1 publication Critical patent/WO2012032745A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • G09G3/34Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source
    • G09G3/36Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source using liquid crystals
    • G09G3/3611Control of matrices with row and column drivers
    • G09G3/3648Control of matrices with row and column drivers using an active matrix
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1347Arrangement of liquid crystal layers or cells in which the final condition of one light beam is achieved by the addition of the effects of two or more layers or cells
    • G02F1/13476Arrangement of liquid crystal layers or cells in which the final condition of one light beam is achieved by the addition of the effects of two or more layers or cells in which at least one liquid crystal cell or layer assumes a scattering state
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/137Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells characterised by the electro-optical or magneto-optical effect, e.g. field-induced phase transition, orientation effect, guest-host interaction or dynamic scattering
    • G02F1/139Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells characterised by the electro-optical or magneto-optical effect, e.g. field-induced phase transition, orientation effect, guest-host interaction or dynamic scattering based on orientation effects in which the liquid crystal remains transparent
    • G02F1/1391Bistable or multi-stable liquid crystal cells
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/137Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells characterised by the electro-optical or magneto-optical effect, e.g. field-induced phase transition, orientation effect, guest-host interaction or dynamic scattering
    • G02F1/13718Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells characterised by the electro-optical or magneto-optical effect, e.g. field-induced phase transition, orientation effect, guest-host interaction or dynamic scattering based on a change of the texture state of a cholesteric liquid crystal
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/137Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells characterised by the electro-optical or magneto-optical effect, e.g. field-induced phase transition, orientation effect, guest-host interaction or dynamic scattering
    • G02F1/139Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells characterised by the electro-optical or magneto-optical effect, e.g. field-induced phase transition, orientation effect, guest-host interaction or dynamic scattering based on orientation effects in which the liquid crystal remains transparent
    • G02F1/141Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells characterised by the electro-optical or magneto-optical effect, e.g. field-induced phase transition, orientation effect, guest-host interaction or dynamic scattering based on orientation effects in which the liquid crystal remains transparent using ferroelectric liquid crystals
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2300/00Aspects of the constitution of display devices
    • G09G2300/04Structural and physical details of display devices
    • G09G2300/0439Pixel structures
    • G09G2300/0456Pixel structures with a reflective area and a transmissive area combined in one pixel, such as in transflectance pixels
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2360/00Aspects of the architecture of display systems
    • G09G2360/14Detecting light within display terminals, e.g. using a single or a plurality of photosensors
    • G09G2360/144Detecting light within display terminals, e.g. using a single or a plurality of photosensors the light being ambient light

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a display device, a display panel, a display module, an image display system, and an image display method used for digital signage and the like.
  • the present invention relates to an image display system and an image display method.
  • Patent Documents 1 and 2 which advertises by playing high-quality video such as high-definition image quality on the display of the image display panel outdoors or in stores. System exists.
  • Digital signage can distribute advertisements and the like by distributing and displaying moving images and still images on an image display panel using a network or the like. Since this digital signage display has the advantages of being thin, light and low power consumption, for example, a liquid crystal display panel is often used as an image display panel.
  • Patent Document 3 discloses a liquid crystal display device having a display region in which a plurality of subpixels each having a region and a light transmission region are formed.
  • This liquid crystal display device is configured such that the light reflection region and the light transmission region of each of the plurality of sub-pixels are driven independently of each other.
  • the light reflection region is temporarily DC-driven to display a specific image.
  • the specific image is continuously displayed on the display even in the power saving state.
  • the present invention has been made in view of such problems, and a display device, a display panel, a display module, an image display system, and an image capable of displaying information that can be sufficiently used as an advertisement / identification medium even in a power saving state.
  • An object is to provide a display method.
  • a light scattering liquid crystal display panel configured by sandwiching a light scattering liquid crystal layer between transparent substrates, and disposed on the back side of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel,
  • a display device having an image display panel for forming an image, and a light / dark image display area for displaying a light / dark image composed of a combination of light color display and dark color display in a display area of a display surface of the display device;
  • a predetermined image display area for displaying a predetermined image formed on the display panel.
  • the light color display is a color display with a high degree of brightness, and is not particularly limited, but for example, white, cream, light cyan, yellow, silver, light gray, etc.
  • the dark color display is a color display with a low degree of brightness, and is not particularly limited. For example, in addition to black, brown, amber, dark green, oil color, etc. It is a display of chromatic or achromatic color.
  • the predetermined image is a predetermined image formed on the image display panel, is an image including at least one of characters, figures, and symbols, includes both moving images and still images, although not particularly limited, for example, a news telop, a television image, a music movie, a CM movie, a movie movie, or an evacuation instruction image at the time of a disaster.
  • the display device includes a light scattering liquid crystal display panel in which a light scattering liquid crystal layer is sandwiched between transparent substrates, and a back side of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel.
  • An image display panel arranged to form an image, and a dark color display for bringing the light-scattering liquid crystal layer into a light-transmitting state in a display area of the display surface, and the dark color display.
  • An image display control unit that controls to set a predetermined image display area for displaying a predetermined image formed on the image display panel via the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel is provided.
  • the bright / dark image is displayed in the power saving state in the light / dark image display area while displaying the predetermined image in the predetermined image display area, and the advertisement / identification function is exhibited.
  • the advertisement / identification function is exhibited.
  • the image display control unit includes a plurality of light receiving sensors that receive external light applied to the display area of the display surface of the display device, and the image display control unit sets a reference value in advance for the light receiving information obtained by the light receiving sensor. It is preferable that the predetermined image display area and the bright and dark image display area are set based on the light reception information when the light reception information that is determined and exceeds the reference value is obtained by the light reception sensor.
  • the external light means light emitted from other than the display device. For example, even when the display device is placed indoors, it does not matter whether the light is emitted by indoor lighting or from outside the room.
  • the predetermined image display area is provided in a relatively dark area where no external light is irradiated and the predetermined image is displayed there, it is difficult for the predetermined image to be difficult to see due to the external light. Further, since the bright and dark image is displayed in the region irradiated with the external light, the bright color display is clearly displayed on the light scattering liquid crystal layer in the light scattering state, and the bright and dark image can be displayed with high contrast.
  • the image display control unit changes the size of the light / dark image according to the size of the light / dark image display area. According to this configuration, since the size of the light / dark image is changed according to the changed size of the light / dark image display area, the light / dark image can be appropriately displayed to the observer.
  • the image display control unit changes the size of the predetermined image according to the size of the predetermined image display area. According to this configuration, since the size of the predetermined image is changed according to the changed size of the predetermined image display area, the predetermined image can be appropriately displayed to the observer.
  • the image display control unit may include the predetermined image display area in an area excluding a part in the display area where the received light information exceeding the reference value is obtained based on the received light information obtained by the light receiving sensor. It is possible to set the main area. According to this configuration, since the main area of the predetermined image can be displayed in a relatively dark area that is not irradiated with external light, most of the predetermined image can be displayed to the observer.
  • the main area of the predetermined image display area is set in an area excluding the part where the light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained, the light reception information in which most of the predetermined image display area exceeds the reference value is set. It means that it belongs to the area excluding the obtained part and the observer can recognize the predetermined image.
  • 70% to 99% of the area of the predetermined image display area Preferably 80% to 99%, more preferably 90% to 99%, belongs to a region excluding a region where light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained.
  • the image display control unit is configured to display at least the predetermined image in an area excluding a part of the display area where light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained based on light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor. It is possible to set so that the center part of an area is located. The observer's attention tends to go to the center of the image. According to this configuration, the center of the predetermined image can be displayed in a relatively dark area not irradiated with external light. It can be displayed to the observer.
  • the image display control unit may include the predetermined image display area in an area excluding a part in the display area where the received light information exceeding the reference value is obtained based on the received light information obtained by the light receiving sensor. Can be set. According to this configuration, since the predetermined image can be displayed in a relatively dark area where no external light is irradiated, the predetermined image can be accurately displayed to the observer.
  • the image display control unit sets the main area of the bright and dark image display area in an area in the display area where the received light information exceeding the reference value is obtained based on the received light information obtained by the light receiving sensor. It is possible to set. According to this configuration, since the main area of the bright and dark image can be displayed in an area that exceeds the reference value, most of the bright and dark images can be displayed to the observer with good contrast.
  • setting the main region of the light / dark image display area in the region where the light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained means that the region where the light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained in most regions of the light / dark image display area And that the observer can recognize a bright and dark image, and is not particularly limited. For example, 70% to 99%, preferably 80% to 99% of the bright and dark image display area, More preferably, it means that 90% to 99% belongs to a region where received light information exceeding the reference value is obtained.
  • the image display control unit places a central portion of the light / dark image display area in an area where the light receiving information exceeding the reference value is obtained in the display area based on the light receiving information obtained by the light receiving sensor. It is possible to set. Since the observer's attention tends to go to the center of the image, according to this configuration, the center of the light / dark image can be displayed in a bright area that exceeds the reference value, so that an easy-to-see light / dark image is displayed to the observer. It becomes possible.
  • the image display control unit sets the light / dark image display area in a region where light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained in the display region based on light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor. Is possible. According to this configuration, since the bright and dark image can be displayed in the area irradiated with external light, the entire bright and dark image can be displayed to the observer with good contrast.
  • the image display control unit divides the display area into two areas of right and left or upper and lower areas that are equal to each other, the area of the portion of the two areas where the received light information exceeding the reference value is obtained. It is possible to set the predetermined image display area in one area having a small size and set the bright and dark image display area in the other area.
  • the arrangement of the predetermined image display area and the light and dark image display area is appropriately switched by setting the left and right or up and down positions by the image display control unit. Therefore, the control by the image display control unit can be simplified and an image can be displayed to the observer.
  • an altitude reference value higher than the reference value is predetermined for the light receiving information obtained by the light receiving sensor, and when the light receiving information exceeding the altitude reference value is obtained by the light receiving sensor, The image display control unit sets the predetermined image display area and the light / dark image display area in an area excluding a part of the display area where the received light information exceeding the altitude reference value is obtained based on the received light information. Is possible.
  • both the dark image display area and the predetermined image display area are set to a relatively dark area other than the direct irradiation area with high intensity external light. Both the dark image display area and the predetermined image display area can be accurately displayed to the observer.
  • an altitude reference value higher than the reference value is predetermined for the light receiving information obtained by the light receiving sensor, and the area where the light receiving information exceeding the altitude reference value is obtained by the light receiving sensor is the display area.
  • the image display control unit can temporarily stop displaying an image in the display area.
  • the dark image display area and the predetermined image display area are both relatively dark areas. Even if it is set, the image size of the dark image and the predetermined image will be small.
  • the power supply for driving the display device is prevented by not displaying an image with insufficient advertising / identification function. Can save consumption.
  • an altitude reference value higher than the reference value is predetermined for the light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor, and light reception information exceeding the altitude reference value is received in the center portion of the display area.
  • the image display control unit can temporarily stop displaying an image in the display area.
  • the center of the display area is easy to enter the viewer's field of view, if it becomes difficult to see the center of the display area, it is difficult to grasp the contents of the entire display image. Since the unit stops displaying an image in the display area when it becomes difficult to see the center of the display area, it is possible to suppress the stress of the observer due to the display of the difficult-to-view image.
  • the image display control unit continues the predetermined time and receives the light receiving information exceeding the reference value by the light receiving sensor, based on the light receiving information, the predetermined image display area.
  • the bright and dark image display area can be set.
  • the image display control unit continues to be constant at a predetermined time.
  • the received light information is obtained by the light receiving sensor, the image display is controlled on the basis of the fixed received light information, so that the flickering of the image display hardly occurs.
  • the light receiving sensors are arranged in a dispersed manner in the display area. According to this configuration, it is possible to detect the intensity of external light at various locations in the display area, and control can be performed with higher accuracy.
  • the light receiving sensors may be arranged in regions where the pixels are formed in a plan view of the liquid crystal panel. According to this configuration, it is possible to accurately detect the intensity of external light at each pixel.
  • the light receiving sensors may be distributed along a line set so as to traverse or longitudinally cross the display area. According to this configuration, the brightness of the external light can be detected along a line set so as to traverse or vertically cross the display area, and the number of light receiving sensors can be reduced.
  • the display area may be rectangular, and the light receiving sensor may be arranged in the display area along a line connecting the midpoints of at least two opposite sides of the four sides of the display area. is there. According to this configuration, it is possible to obtain light reception information that roughly reflects the luminance distribution of the external light that irradiates the entire display area.
  • the display area may be rectangular, and the light receiving sensor may be disposed on a peripheral portion of the display area along at least two opposite sides of the four sides of the display area. According to this configuration, since a decrease in the aperture ratio can be reduced as compared with the case where the light receiving sensor is arranged at the center of the display area, a decrease in luminance of the display image is not easily recognized by the user.
  • the display area may be rectangular, and the light receiving sensor may be disposed along at least one of the diagonal lines of the display area. Also with this configuration, it is possible to obtain light reception information that roughly reflects the luminance distribution of the external light that irradiates the entire display region.
  • priority information indicating the priority of the display image is predetermined for each display image, and the image display control unit sets the predetermined image display area and the light and dark image display area based on the priority information. It is also possible to do.
  • the predetermined image display area and the light / dark image display area are set based on the priority information of the display image, it is possible to accurately display information desirable for the observer.
  • the priority of the priority information is changed depending on time. According to this configuration, it is possible to change the priority information of the display image in real time, for example, and thus it is possible to display information desirable for the observer more accurately.
  • the image display control unit can set the predetermined image display area and the light / dark image display area based on the display content of the display image.
  • the predetermined image display area and the light / dark image display area are set based on the display content of the display image, a display that is easy for the observer to see is possible.
  • the image display control unit can set a third area other than the predetermined image display area and the bright and dark image display area in the display area of the display surface of the display device.
  • the image display panel is a liquid crystal display panel configured by sandwiching a liquid crystal layer between transparent substrates, a backlight for irradiating illumination light to the back side of the liquid crystal display panel, lighting of the backlight, and And a backlight control unit that controls a light-off state.
  • the display device can be configured with low power consumption and a thin shape.
  • the image display control unit sets a liquid crystal layer of the liquid crystal display panel corresponding to the light and dark image display area to a light non-transmissive state. According to this configuration, since the liquid crystal layer of the liquid crystal display panel corresponding to the light and dark image display area is in a light non-transmissive state, the light from the back side of the liquid crystal display panel does not pass through the liquid crystal display panel, and thus the light scattering property A dark color display formed at a predetermined position on the liquid crystal display panel can be clearly displayed.
  • the backlight control unit turns on the backlight corresponding to the predetermined image display area, while turning off the backlight corresponding to the light and dark image display area, or turns on the backlight in a low power consumption state.
  • to turn on the backlight in a low power consumption state means to turn on an illumination part of the backlight dimly to keep power consumption low.
  • an image can be brightly displayed by backlight illumination at a location corresponding to the predetermined image display area, while the backlight is turned off or in a low power consumption state at a location corresponding to the light / dark image display area. Since it is turned on, power saving can be achieved.
  • the backlight includes a plurality of light emitting units, and the backlight control unit turns on the backlight corresponding to the predetermined image display area, while the backlight corresponding to the light and dark image display area It is also possible to turn on a part of the light emitting part and turn off the other part of the light emitting part of the backlight corresponding to the bright and dark image display area. In this configuration, the contrast of bright / dark image display is improved, and only a part of the backlight is lit at a location corresponding to the bright / dark image display region, so that power saving can be achieved.
  • the image display panel is a liquid crystal display panel configured by sandwiching a liquid crystal layer between transparent substrates, a backlight for irradiating illumination light to the back side of the liquid crystal display panel, lighting of the backlight, and A backlight control unit that controls a light-off state, a light-out period in which the backlight is turned off, and an intermittent drive control unit that alternately switches between a lighting period in which the backlight is turned on, and the image display control unit includes: It is also possible to set the predetermined image display area and the light / dark image display area based on light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor when the backlight is turned off by the intermittent drive control unit.
  • the light receiving sensor may be disposed inside the light scattering liquid crystal display panel. According to this configuration, it is possible to easily detect the external light applied to the display area accurately.
  • the light receiving sensor may be disposed inside the liquid crystal display panel. Also with this configuration, it is possible to detect the external light irradiated on the display area.
  • the light receiving sensor may be disposed in the backlight. According to this configuration, since the light receiving sensor can be arranged in the display area without covering the opening formed in the display pixel of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel, a decrease in the aperture ratio of the display pixel can be prevented.
  • the light receiving sensor may be disposed between the liquid crystal display panel and the backlight. According to this configuration, since the light receiving sensor is not provided directly on the light scattering liquid crystal display panel, the liquid crystal display panel, or the backlight, the light receiving sensor can be used without changing the structure of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel, the liquid crystal display panel, or the backlight. A sensor can be provided.
  • the transparent substrate on the front side of the image display panel and the transparent substrate on the back side of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel are commonly used as one transparent substrate. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in light transmittance due to the overlapping of the plurality of transparent substrates, and it is possible to reduce the thickness of the display device.
  • the light-scattering liquid crystal layer is preferably a memory liquid crystal layer.
  • the memory liquid crystal layer is a liquid crystal having a plurality of optical states and maintaining a specific state (memory characteristics) without forming an electric field.
  • data including at least one of video data and audio data of digital signage content distributed via the digital broadcast wave of the Internet or a broadcasting station is received, and the received digital signage content is converted into the light scattering property. It is preferable to display on at least one of a liquid crystal display panel and the image display panel.
  • an advertisement composed of a plurality of images can be suitably viewed by an observer (customer) who has visited a store or the like, and is installed outdoors, for example, and easily affected by external light. It can be suitably used for an information display.
  • the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel is composed of a plurality of individual light-scattering liquid crystal display panels configured by sandwiching a light-scattering liquid crystal layer between transparent substrates to form one display panel as a whole.
  • the image display panel may be a collection of a plurality of individual image display panels that form an image to form a single display panel as a whole.
  • a large display device such as an information display or billboard display used as an information transmission medium such as a signboard, an advertisement, or a sign installed outdoors can be configured.
  • the image display control unit controls the individual light scattering liquid crystal display panel and the individual image display panel independently of each other. According to this configuration, since the light / dark image display area and the predetermined image display area can be set at the individual display unit partition composed of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel and the image display panel, display is performed in units of display units. Alternatively, non-display is possible and further power saving is possible.
  • a display panel is disposed on a light scattering liquid crystal display panel in which a light scattering liquid crystal layer is sandwiched between transparent substrates, and on the back side of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel.
  • An image display panel for forming an image, and a dark color display in which the light scattering liquid crystal layer is in a light transmitting state in a display area of a display surface, and a light scattering liquid crystal layer at a location different from the dark color display By combining light-colored display in a light-scattering state, a light-dark image display area for displaying a light-dark image, and a light-transmitting liquid crystal layer in a light-transmitting state, a predetermined formed on the image display panel And a predetermined image display area for displaying an image via the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel.
  • a display module is disposed on a light scattering liquid crystal display panel in which a light scattering liquid crystal layer is sandwiched between transparent substrates, and on the back side of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel.
  • a display module comprising an image display panel for forming an image and a plurality of light receiving sensors for receiving external light irradiated on a display area of a display surface, wherein the light receiving information obtained by the light receiving sensor A reference value is determined in advance, and when light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained by the light reception sensor, based on the light reception information, dark display that makes the light-scattering liquid crystal layer in a light transmission state,
  • a light color display in which the light scattering liquid crystal layer is in a light scattering state at a different location from the dark color display, a light / dark image display area for displaying a light / dark image and light transmission through the light scattering liquid crystal layer By setting the state, a predetermined image display area for displaying a
  • An image display system includes a light-scattering liquid crystal display panel in which a light-scattering liquid crystal layer is sandwiched between transparent substrates, and a back side of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel.
  • An image comprising: a display device having an image display panel that is arranged to form an image; and an external processing device that creates an image signal for displaying an image in a display area of a display surface and sends the image signal to the display device
  • a dark color display in which the light scattering liquid crystal layer is in a light transmission state, and a light in which the light scattering liquid crystal layer is in a light scattering state at a location different from the dark color display.
  • An image display method includes a light-scattering liquid crystal display panel in which a light-scattering liquid crystal layer is sandwiched between transparent substrates, and a back side of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel.
  • a display device having an image display panel for forming an image, a dark color display for making the light-scattering liquid crystal layer in a light transmission state in a display area of a display surface, and a place different from the dark color display
  • the image display An image is displayed so as to have a predetermined image display area for displaying a predetermined image formed on the panel via the light scattering liquid crystal display panel.
  • a light / dark image display area for displaying a light / dark image composed of a combination of light color display and dark color display, and a predetermined image for displaying a predetermined image formed on the image display panel
  • the light scattering liquid crystal layer is light-transmitted in a predetermined position to perform dark color display, and the light scattering liquid crystal layer is light scattered in other positions to perform light color display.
  • a bright and dark image composed of a combination of the bright color display and the dark color display is displayed.
  • the light-scattering liquid crystal layer of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel is set in a light transmitting state, thereby displaying a predetermined image formed on the image display panel via the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel.
  • the light-scattering liquid crystal layer of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel is set in a light-scattering state to perform bright color display at a predetermined location on the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel, and in a light-transmitting state.
  • a light-scattering state to perform bright color display at a predetermined location on the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel, and in a light-transmitting state.
  • an image composed of the combination of the bright color and the dark color display is displayed in the light / dark image display area, so that the identification information can be displayed in the power saving state.
  • the advertisement information can be displayed since the predetermined image formed on the image display panel is displayed in the predetermined image display area, the advertisement information can be displayed.
  • FIG. 5 is a modification of the display mode of the bright / dark image display area and the predetermined image display area when external light is directly applied to the display area, and is a diagram in which the predetermined image display area and the bright / dark image display area are switched up and down and displayed. It is. This is a modification of the display mode of the bright and dark image display area and the predetermined image display area when external light having high intensity is directly irradiated on the display area.
  • FIG. 10 is a block diagram of a display device that is a modification of the arrangement of the light receiving sensors and schematically shows the arrangement along the line connecting the midpoints of two opposite sides of the four sides of the display region.
  • FIG. 10 is a block diagram of a display device that is a modification of the arrangement of the light receiving sensors and schematically shows the arrangement along the line connecting the midpoints of two opposite sides of the four sides of the display region.
  • FIG. 10 is a block diagram of a display device that is a modification of the arrangement of the light receiving sensors and schematically shows the arrangement of the light receiving sensors along at least two opposite sides of the four sides of the display area 90 in the peripheral portion of the display area.
  • FIG. 10 is a block diagram of a display device that is a modification of the arrangement of the light receiving sensors and schematically shows the arrangement of the light receiving sensors along at least two opposite sides of the four sides of the display area 90 in the peripheral portion of the display area.
  • FIG. 10 is a block diagram of a display device that is a modification of the arrangement of the light receiving sensors and schematically shows the arrangement of the light receiving sensors along at least one diagonal line of the display region.
  • FIG. 10 is a block diagram of a display device that is a modification of the arrangement of the light receiving sensors and schematically shows the arrangement at the four corners of the peripheral portion of the display region.
  • FIG. 10 is a block diagram of a display device that is a modification of the arrangement of the light receiving sensors and schematically shows an arrangement in which the display area is divided into a plurality of areas and the light receiving sensors are associated with the positions.
  • FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged plan view schematically showing a backlight, and is a diagram showing a state in which a light receiving sensor is arranged in the backlight. It is a top view which shows one specific example of the display apparatus which displayed the brightness image and the predetermined image on the display area in consideration of the priority information of an image.
  • FIG. 1 It is a figure explaining the display mode which makes the viewing angle dependence of the image of a predetermined image display area variable, and is a figure which shows the case where a display with much visual dependence is performed. It is explanatory drawing of the display apparatus which formed the reflecting mirror board. The figure explaining the display screen of the display apparatus which comprised the display unit which comprised the single light-scattering liquid crystal display panel and the single liquid crystal display panel, and comprised the display unit in the matrix form, and comprised the display area. It is. FIG.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a state in which a bright / dark image display area and a predetermined image display area are set when external light is irradiated on the display area in a display device in which display units are arranged in a matrix to form a display area. . It is a block diagram which shows a display module typically.
  • Embodiment 1 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the accompanying drawings. However, the embodiments are for facilitating understanding of the principle of the present invention, and the scope of the present invention is as follows. The present invention is not limited to the embodiments, and other embodiments in which those skilled in the art appropriately replace the configurations of the following embodiments are also included in the scope of the present invention.
  • FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of the entire display device 900 according to the present embodiment.
  • the liquid crystal display panel 100 is used as the image display panel.
  • a display device 900 includes a liquid crystal display panel 100 that displays an image during normal use, a backlight 300 that irradiates illumination light to the back side of the liquid crystal display panel 100, and a light-scattering liquid crystal layer.
  • a light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 sandwiched between substrates, an image display control unit 500, and a backlight control unit 501 for controlling the lighting and extinguishing states of the backlight 300 are configured.
  • the liquid crystal display panel 100 is disposed to face the back side (that is, the backlight side) of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200.
  • FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of the display device 900 according to the present embodiment.
  • the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 is, for example, an active matrix type liquid crystal display panel, and includes, for example, a second transparent substrate 12 that is an array substrate disposed on the back side, and a second transparent substrate.
  • Memory liquid crystal as a light scattering liquid crystal layer sandwiched between a first transparent substrate 11 and a second transparent substrate 12, for example, a first transparent substrate 11 that is disposed on the front side facing the substrate 12.
  • Layer 36
  • the memory liquid crystal of the memory liquid crystal layer 36 is not particularly limited.
  • a ferroelectric liquid crystal or a cholesteric liquid crystal having excellent memory characteristics can be used.
  • a counter electrode 25 is formed on the inner surface of the first transparent substrate 11, that is, the back surface, and a pixel electrode 23 is formed on the inner surface of the second transparent substrate 12, that is, the front surface.
  • the counter electrode 25 is given a predetermined counter potential from an external drive circuit (not shown).
  • a liquid crystal display panel 100 is disposed on the back side of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200.
  • the liquid crystal display panel 100 is also an active matrix type liquid crystal display panel, for example, and is disposed on the front side facing the fourth transparent substrate 14 and the fourth transparent substrate 14 that is, for example, an array substrate disposed on the back side.
  • it has the 3rd transparent substrate 13 which is a counter substrate, and the liquid crystal layer 26 pinched
  • the third transparent substrate 13 of the liquid crystal display panel 100 and the second transparent substrate 12 of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 are disposed to face each other.
  • the periphery of the third transparent substrate 13 and the fourth transparent substrate 14 is sealed with a sealing material 39.
  • TN twistedmaticnematic
  • GH guest-host
  • STN super-twistednematic
  • SBE super-twistedbirefringence effect
  • ECB Electrode controlled birefringence
  • a counter electrode 35 is formed on the inner surface of the third transparent substrate 13, that is, the back surface, and a pixel electrode 33 is formed on the inner surface of the fourth transparent substrate 14, that is, the front surface.
  • a predetermined counter potential is applied to the counter electrode 35 from an external drive circuit (not shown).
  • an external drive circuit not shown.
  • substrate which has light transmittances such as a glass plate and a quartz plate, is used. can do.
  • the pixel electrodes 23 and 33 and the counter electrodes 25 and 35 are formed of a light transmissive conductive material such as ITO (indium tin oxide).
  • the liquid crystal display panel 100 and the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 are arranged with a predetermined interval through, for example, a spacer, but are not limited thereto, and the liquid crystal display panel 100 and the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 are arranged.
  • the second transparent substrate 12 of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 and the third transparent substrate 13 of the liquid crystal display panel 100 can be disposed in close contact with each other.
  • a backlight 300 is disposed on the back side of the liquid crystal display panel 100.
  • FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged plan view schematically showing the backlight 300.
  • the backlight 300 includes a backlight chassis 301 that is a substantially rectangular casing. An opening is formed on the front side of the backlight chassis 301.
  • the backlight 300 includes a plurality of irradiation units 302 that irradiate light to the back surface of the liquid crystal display panel 100.
  • the irradiating unit 302 includes a plurality of point light sources 302a.
  • the luminance and chromaticity of the illumination light irradiated from the backlight 300 are partially set. Can be adjusted.
  • the irradiation part 302 is arrange
  • the point light source 302a is composed of, for example, a light emitting diode (LED). That is, one irradiation unit 302 is formed by a plurality of LEDs 302a.
  • the illumination light generated from the backlight 300 may be preferably white light.
  • the irradiation unit 302 is formed by LEDs 302a of three colors of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), and the illumination light is converted into white light by mixing light generated from the LEDs 302a of RGB three colors. I have to.
  • the method of making illumination light white light is not limited to the above-mentioned method.
  • the irradiation unit 302 may be formed from a white LED that emits white light.
  • the brightness of the illumination light is adjusted by controlling the power input to each LED 302a of the irradiation unit 302. That is, the illumination light becomes bright (the luminance is high) when the power input to the irradiation unit 302 is high, and the illumination light is dark (the luminance is low) when the power is low.
  • the power input to the irradiation unit 302 may be controlled by, for example, a pulse width modulation method, a PWM method (pulse width modulation), or the like.
  • the configuration of the display device 900 is not limited to the configuration including the four transparent substrates as described above, and the third transparent substrate and the light scattering property of the image display panel 100 as illustrated in FIG.
  • the second transparent substrate of the liquid crystal display panel 200 may be configured as one common transparent substrate 15 in common.
  • the pixel electrode 23 is formed on the front surface of the common transparent substrate 15, and the counter electrode 35 is formed on the rear surface of the common transparent substrate 15. It is formed. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in light transmittance due to the overlapping of a plurality of transparent substrates, and it is possible to reduce the thickness of the display device, which meets the recent demand for thinner liquid crystal display panels. can do.
  • the image display control unit 500 sets a light / dark image display area for displaying a light / dark image and a predetermined image display area for displaying a predetermined image, and displays them in the display area.
  • FIG. 5 is an active matrix circuit configuration diagram of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200.
  • the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 includes a display region 90 in which a plurality of display pixels 80 are formed, a gate driver 110, and a source driver 120.
  • a plurality of scanning lines 22 and a plurality of signal lines 21 intersecting with the scanning lines 22 are arranged on the second transparent substrate 12 in a matrix shape via an insulating film (not shown).
  • display pixels 80 are arranged at each intersection of the scanning lines 22. That is, in the display area 90, a plurality of display pixels 80 are arranged in a matrix.
  • the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 has a generally rectangular shape as a whole, and the shape of the display region 90 is also generally rectangular.
  • the display pixel 80 includes a pixel electrode 23, a thin film transistor (TFT) 24, a counter electrode 25, and a memory liquid crystal layer 36.
  • the source of the TFT 24 is connected to the signal line 21, the gate is connected to the scanning line 22, and the drain is connected to the pixel electrode 23.
  • the gate driver 110 includes a buffer circuit and a shift register (not shown), and sequentially outputs scanning signals to the scanning lines 22 based on control signals supplied from an external driving circuit (not shown). .
  • the gate driver 110 sets the control signal line 30 to the off level and sequentially scans the scanning lines 22 as in the case of a normal active matrix liquid crystal display panel. Output the signal.
  • the scanning line 22 is turned off and the control signal line 30 is turned on. .
  • the source driver 120 includes an analog switch, a shift register, and the like, and a video signal is supplied from an external drive circuit (not shown) through a control signal and a video bus.
  • the source driver 120 samples the video signal supplied from the video bus on the signal line 21 at a predetermined timing by supplying an analog switch open / close signal from the shift register.
  • the active matrix circuit configuration of the liquid crystal display panel 100 is formed in the same manner as the active matrix circuit configuration of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 described above.
  • a plurality of scanning lines and a plurality of signal lines intersecting with the scanning lines are arranged in a matrix shape through an insulating film, and display pixels are arranged at the intersections of the signal lines and the scanning lines. Is arranged, and the display area is configured by including the display pixels.
  • the display pixel includes a pixel electrode 33, a TFT, a counter electrode 35, and a liquid crystal layer 26.
  • the TFT has a source connected to the signal line, a gate connected to the scanning line, and a drain connected to the pixel electrode.
  • FIG. 6A to 6F are schematic views of the manufacturing process of the display device 900.
  • FIG. 6A an amorphous silicon thin film 71 is deposited on a glass substrate 41 by a plasma CVD method, and this amorphous silicon thin film 71 is annealed with a laser device to be polycrystallized.
  • the laser beam 72 from the laser device is scanned in the direction of the arrow in the drawing, and the region irradiated with the laser beam 72 is crystallized to become a polycrystalline silicon film 73.
  • the polycrystalline silicon film 73 is patterned by, eg, photolithography to form an active layer 74 of the TFT.
  • a gate insulating film 75 made of a silicon oxide film is formed by, for example, a plasma CVD method, and then a gate electrode 76 is formed by patterning by forming, for example, a Mo—W alloy film by a sputtering method or the like. Form. Scan lines are also formed simultaneously during patterning.
  • impurities are implanted by, for example, ion doping using the gate electrode 76 as a mask to form a source / drain region 78 of the TFT.
  • a first interlayer insulating film 77 made of a silicon oxide film is formed on the gate electrode 76 by plasma CVD.
  • an aluminum film is formed by sputtering and patterned to form source / drain electrodes 79. At this time, a signal line is also formed.
  • a second interlayer insulating film 83 is formed on the aluminum film. Then, a contact hole is formed in the second interlayer insulating film 83, and a pixel electrode 23 is further formed.
  • gate electrodes, source / drain electrodes, scanning lines, and signal lines are formed on the front side, and a counter electrode 25 is formed on the back side by sputtering or the like.
  • a first transparent substrate is prepared.
  • the first transparent substrate 11 and the second transparent substrate 12 are opposed to each other, the periphery is sealed with a sealing material 29, the composition of the memory liquid crystal layer 36 is injected therein, and the light scattering liquid crystal is sealed therein.
  • a display panel 200 is formed.
  • the third transparent substrate 13 and the fourth transparent substrate 14 are opposed to each other, the periphery is sealed with a sealing material 39, and the liquid crystal layer is contained inside.
  • the liquid crystal display panel 100 is formed by injecting and sealing 26 compositions.
  • the display device 900 is manufactured by arranging the second transparent substrate 12 of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 and the third transparent substrate 13 of the liquid crystal display panel 100 to face each other.
  • a display panel including the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 and the image display panel 100 is manufactured during the manufacturing process of the display device 900.
  • the display panel includes a plurality of display pixels 80 in the display area 90.
  • the display area 90 on the display surface of the display panel is set to have a light / dark image display area for displaying a light / dark image composed of a combination of bright color display and dark color display, and a predetermined image display area for displaying a predetermined image.
  • the display panel may be a display panel with a light receiving sensor 180 described later.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 is arranged to receive external light irradiated on the display area 90 at a plurality of positions in the display area 90.
  • the display panel with the light receiving sensor 180 can examine variations in luminance distribution generated in the display area 90 due to the influence of external light irradiated on the display area 90.
  • FIG. 7 is a block diagram of an image display system 910 as a digital signage system that includes a display device 900 and an external processing device 421 that generates an image signal for displaying an image and sends the image signal to the display device 900.
  • the image display system 910 is not limited to a digital signage device 410 in which the display device 900 according to the present invention is used as a display device, but is dedicated to, for example, the Internet 420 or the like.
  • an external processing device 421 is a device that is installed at an entrance of a store or a company and displays contents such as advertisements and information for employees.
  • the communication circuit control unit 411 connects the electronic signboard device 410 to the external processing device 421 via the Internet 420.
  • the provided content is automatically distributed from the external processing device 421, or a predetermined URL is input from the URL memory 414 by operating the electronic signage device 410, or manually input from the operation unit 415 to perform external processing.
  • the received content data is temporarily stored in the received data memory 412.
  • the browser memory 413 stores browser software that generates predetermined display screen contents from the received content.
  • the operation unit 415 is operated to select and read the necessary content from the reception data memory 412, and a display screen signal is generated from the content data and displayed on the display device 900.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a specific example in which a bright / dark image display area 710 and a predetermined image display area 720 are set and displayed in the display area 90.
  • the image display control unit 500 sets a bright and dark image display area 710 and a predetermined image display area 720 and displays them in the display area 90.
  • a light / dark image 711 is displayed in the light / dark image display area 710, and the light / dark image 711 is not particularly limited, but is an image made up of letters, numbers, symbols, figures, or a combination thereof. Such as weather marks.
  • a predetermined image 721 is displayed in the predetermined image display area 720, and the predetermined image 721 is not particularly limited, but is, for example, a news telop, a news video, or the like.
  • FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view illustrating how the display device 900 is used.
  • the image display control unit 500 applies a voltage between the pixel electrode 23 and the counter electrode 25, thereby aligning the liquid crystal molecules 38 in the memory liquid crystal layer 36.
  • the memory liquid crystal layer 36 of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 is changed to a light transmission state.
  • the backlight control unit 501 turns on the irradiation unit 302 of the backlight 300 corresponding to the predetermined image display area 720.
  • content distributed from the external processing device 421 to the liquid crystal display panel 100 of the display device 900 passes through the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 and is recognized by the observer.
  • the light scattering liquid crystal display panel is displayed by the image display control unit 500.
  • the liquid crystal molecules 38 in the memory liquid crystal layer 36 are set in a random state without forming an electric field between the pixel electrode 23 and the counter electrode 25 at a predetermined position 200, and the memory liquid crystal layer 36 of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 is light-scattered.
  • bright color display for example, white display W
  • white display W is performed at a predetermined location on the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200.
  • a voltage is applied between the pixel electrode 23 and the counter electrode 25 to align the liquid crystal molecules 38 in the memory liquid crystal layer 36.
  • a dark color display (for example, black display B) is performed on the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 by changing the memory liquid crystal layer 36 to an aligned state and a light transmitting state.
  • the image display control unit 500 puts the liquid crystal layer 26 of the liquid crystal display panel 100 into a light non-transmissive state.
  • the backlight control unit 501 turns off the irradiation unit 302 of the backlight 300 corresponding to the light and dark image display area 710. As a result, a light / dark image composed of a combination of the light color display and the dark color display is formed on the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200.
  • the driving of the active matrix TFT will be described below with reference to FIG.
  • the scanning signal is output from the gate driver 110 and each scanning line 22 is sequentially turned on, and the video signal is sampled on the signal line 21 in synchronization therewith, all the TFTs 24 connected to the scanning line 22 turned on are
  • the video signal that has been sampled on the signal line 21 is written to the pixel electrode 23 through the TFT 24 during the period of one horizontal scanning.
  • the video signal is charged as a signal voltage between the pixel electrode 23 and the counter electrode 25, and the memory liquid crystal layer 36 is in an oriented state or a random state depending on the presence or absence of the signal voltage, that is, the magnitude of the signal voltage.
  • White display or black display for the display pixel 80 is controlled.
  • a light / dark image (for example, time display) composed of a combination of white display and black display is displayed as a light scattering liquid crystal.
  • a predetermined image display area 720 for example, content distributed from the external processing device 421 can be displayed as a predetermined image (for example, news telop). For this reason, even in a power saving state, it is possible to display information that can be sufficiently used as an advertisement / identification medium.
  • Embodiment 2 a predetermined image display area and a light / dark image display area are set according to the intensity of the external light applied to the display area.
  • FIG. 10 is a block diagram schematically illustrating the structure of the display device 900 according to the second embodiment.
  • the liquid crystal display panel 100 is omitted, and the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 and the backlight 300 are exaggerated and separated.
  • the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 has a display area 90 that is an area for displaying an image, and a frame-shaped non-display area provided around the display area 90.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 is for receiving external light irradiated on the display area 90, and is arranged in a distributed manner in the display area 90, for example. For this reason, the light receiving sensor 180 can obtain light reception information of the external light that irradiates the display region 90 at various sites in the display region 90.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 is disposed in a region where each of the plurality of display pixels 80 is formed in a plan view of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200. For this reason, the light reception information a1 to d1 of the external light that irradiates the display region 90 can be obtained for each display pixel 80 unit.
  • the arrangement of the light receiving sensor 180 is not limited to this.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 is provided for each pixel group (8 pixel ⁇ 8 pixel group, 10 pixel ⁇ 10 pixel group) composed of a plurality of display pixels. May be provided. In this case, the light reception information a1 to d1 can be obtained for each pixel group.
  • the pixel group can be set arbitrarily.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 may be a sensor that generates electrical information according to the received light.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 may be a sensor that generates a photovoltaic force by the received external light.
  • a light receiving sensor 180 for example, a photodiode, a phototransistor, or the like can be used.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 may be a photoresistor whose electric resistance changes according to the intensity of received light.
  • the specific information of the “light reception information” varies depending on the type of sensor, circuit configuration, and the like.
  • a photodiode is used as the light receiving sensor 180.
  • FIG. 11 is a detailed sectional view of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 for explaining the arrangement position of the light receiving sensor 180.
  • a spacer 16 is interposed between the second transparent substrate 12 and the first transparent substrate 11. The interval between the second transparent substrate 12 and the first transparent substrate 11 is maintained at a predetermined interval by the spacer 16.
  • the second transparent substrate 12 includes a pixel electrode 23, a signal line 21, a scanning line 22, a control signal line 30, a planarization layer 44, which are formed on the front side of the glass substrate 41 (that is, the memory liquid crystal layer 36 side).
  • An alignment film 46, a TFT 24, and the like are provided.
  • a black matrix 62 In the first transparent substrate 11, a black matrix 62, a color filter layer 63, a planarizing layer 64, a counter electrode 25, and an alignment film 66 (horizontal alignment film) are formed on the glass substrate 61 on the memory liquid crystal layer 36 side.
  • the black matrix 62 is formed of a material that does not transmit light (for example, a metal such as Cr (chromium)), and is provided between the color filter layers 63 so as to partition each display pixel 80.
  • the color filter layer 63 is a filter that adjusts the color tone.
  • the color filter layer 63 adjusts the color tone of the transmitted light by absorbing light having a wavelength corresponding to a color other than the color of the color filter layer 63.
  • three color filter layers 63 of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) are sequentially arranged for one display pixel 80.
  • the planarization layer 64 is formed so as to cover the black matrix 62 and the color filter layer 63.
  • a counter electrode 25 is formed so as to cover the planarizing layer 64.
  • an alignment film 66 is formed so as to cover the counter electrode 25.
  • the alignment film 66 faces the alignment film 46 of the second transparent substrate 12.
  • the alignment films 46 and 66 of both the substrates 11 and 12 define the alignment direction of the liquid crystal molecules when no voltage is applied. In this embodiment, the alignment film 66 and the alignment film 46 differ in the alignment direction by 90 °.
  • the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 described above is basically the same except that the liquid crystal layer 26 is taught between the third transparent substrate 13 and the fourth transparent substrate 14. It is the same structure as.
  • the display device 900 is configured with the three transparent substrates shown in FIG. 4 will be described as an example, and the liquid crystal display panel 100 side will be described.
  • the color filter layer is not formed in. This is because if the color filter layer is also formed inside the back surface of the common transparent substrate 15, the light transmittance is deteriorated and the transparency is lowered.
  • a black matrix is provided inside the common transparent substrate 15 so as to partition each pixel, and R (red), G (green), and B (blue) are provided between the black matrices. ) Can also be formed. In such a case, a color filter is not formed inside the fourth transparent substrate 14 in order to prevent the light transmittance from being lowered.
  • the color filter layer is formed inside the first transparent substrate, and the color filter layer is formed inside the back surface of the third transparent substrate 13. Not formed. It is also possible to form the color filter layer inside the front surface of the second transparent substrate and not form the color filter layer inside the front surface of the fourth transparent substrate 14.
  • FIG. 13 is a block diagram schematically showing a wiring structure and a control unit of the display device 900 according to the present embodiment.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 is connected to the control unit 550.
  • the photovoltaic power generated by the optical sensor 180 is sent to the control unit 550 as “light reception information a1 to d1”.
  • the control unit 550 is connected to the liquid crystal display panel 100, the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200, and the backlight 300.
  • the control unit 550 receives signals from the light receiving sensor 180 and the external processing device 421.
  • each display pixel 80 is formed with a TFT 24, a liquid crystal capacitor Clc, and an auxiliary capacitor Ccs.
  • the gate electrode 76 of the TFT 24 is connected to the scanning line 22.
  • a source electrode 81 of the TFT 24 is connected to the signal line 21.
  • the auxiliary capacitor Ccs has a first electrode 91 and a second electrode 92.
  • the first electrode 91 is connected to the control signal line 30, while the second electrode 92 is connected to the drain electrode 93 of the TFT 24.
  • the auxiliary capacitor Ccs receives a control signal from the control signal line 30 and maintains the voltage (liquid crystal capacitor Clc) applied to the display pixel 80.
  • the liquid crystal capacitor Clc has a pixel electrode 23 and a counter electrode 25.
  • the pixel electrode 23 is connected to the drain electrode 93 of the TFT 24.
  • the external processing device 421 includes, for example, a plurality of personal computers (PCs) operated by an administrator of the display device 900 and the like, and has image information 422 and priority information 423 for each displayed image. ing.
  • the external processing device 421 may be configured by a network having a plurality of personal computers in addition to a plurality of personal computers.
  • the image information 422 is information of the image itself displayed on the display device 900, and the priority information 423 is information indicating the priority of each display image.
  • the external processing device 421 supplies a digital signal 424 including the image information 422 and priority information 423 to the control unit 550.
  • the control unit 550 is an electronic processing device, and includes a liquid crystal panel control unit 520, a backlight control unit 501, a signal input unit 521, a power source 522, and an image display control unit 500 connected thereto. ing.
  • the control unit 550 is configured to control the liquid crystal display panel 100, the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200, and the backlight 300 based on signals input from the light receiving sensor 180 and the external processing device 421.
  • a digital signal 424 is input from the external processing device 421 to the signal input unit 521, and the signal input unit 521 outputs the input digital signal 424 to the image display control unit 500.
  • reference values are predetermined for the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the light reception sensor 180.
  • the image display control unit 500 sets the light / dark image display area and the predetermined image display area based on the light reception information a1 to d1. Are displayed in the display area 90.
  • the display device 900 sets a bright and dark image display area in the area irradiated with the strong external light.
  • the predetermined image display area is set in other areas, the display information can be appropriately transmitted to the observer.
  • FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the image display control unit 500.
  • the image display control unit 500 includes a reference value setting unit 531, an image output setting unit 532, a signal analysis unit 533, and an image output control unit 534.
  • the reference value setting unit 531 has a function of setting a reference value for the light reception information a 1 to d 1 input from the light receiving sensor 180 and outputting the reference value to the image output setting unit 532.
  • the image output setting unit 532 sets a bright and dark image display area and a predetermined image display area in the display area 90 based on the reference value and the light reception information a1 to d1 input from the light receiving sensor 180, and displays the display area 90. It has a function to display.
  • the image output setting unit 532 outputs control signals related to the set bright / dark image display area and the predetermined image display area to the image output control unit 534 or the backlight control unit 501, respectively.
  • the signal analysis unit 533 analyzes the image information and priority information included in the digital signal received by the signal input unit 521 and outputs the image information and the priority information to the image output control unit 534.
  • the image output control unit 534 has a control function of changing the size of the light / dark image according to the light / dark image display area set by the image output setting unit 532. Further, the image output control unit 534 has a control function of changing the size of the predetermined image in accordance with the predetermined image display area set by the image output setting unit 532. Then, the image output control unit 534 outputs the controlled image signal to the liquid crystal panel control unit 520.
  • the liquid crystal panel control unit 520 is connected to the power source 522 and controls the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 based on the image signal supplied from the image display control unit 500 to adjust the light transmittance of the memory liquid crystal layer 36. To do.
  • the scanning lines 22 (1) to (m) of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 are connected to the gate driver 110, and the signal lines 21 (1) to (n) are connected to the source driver 120.
  • the gate driver 110 and the source driver 120 are each connected to the liquid crystal panel control unit 520.
  • the liquid crystal panel control unit 520 includes a timing controller 525 and supplies a liquid crystal panel control signal created based on the image signal to the gate driver 110 and the source driver 120. At this time, the timing controller 525 adjusts the timing for transmitting the liquid crystal panel control signal to the gate driver 110 and the source driver 120. Thus, based on the image signal, a light and dark image is displayed in the light and dark image display area, and a predetermined image is displayed in the predetermined image display area.
  • the power source 522 supplies operating power to each component of the display device 900. Further, as shown in FIG. 13, the power source 522 supplies the common electrode voltage (Vcom) to the counter electrode 25 of the first transparent substrate 11 in addition to the operation power source.
  • the common electrode voltage (Vcom) supplied to the counter electrode 25 is used as a voltage for applying the memory liquid crystal layer 36 sandwiched between the second transparent substrate 12 and the first transparent substrate 11.
  • the backlight control unit 501 controls the plurality of irradiation units 302 for each of the plurality of areas A to D obtained by dividing the display area 90 based on the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the light reception sensor 180, thereby controlling the illumination light. It has a function of adjusting brightness (luminance).
  • the backlight control unit 501 creates the backlight control signals a2 to d2 based on the control signal supplied from the image output setting unit 532. Electric power controlled based on the backlight control signals a2 to d2 is input to the irradiation unit 302 of the backlight 300. As a result, the illumination light emitted from the backlight 300 is adjusted.
  • the backlight control unit 501 is configured to increase the luminance of illumination light in a region including a predetermined image display area among the plurality of regions (A to D). In this way, the control unit 550 displays a desired image in the display area 90.
  • the signal input unit 521 When the digital signal 424 is input to the signal input unit 521 of the control unit 550, the signal input unit 521 outputs the input digital signal 424 to the signal analysis unit 533 of the image display control unit 500.
  • the signal analysis unit 533 outputs a signal obtained by analyzing the image information and priority information included in the digital signal 424 to the image output control unit 534.
  • FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a method for controlling the display device 900.
  • step S101 of FIG. 16 light reception information a1 to d1 of light incident on the display area 90 is acquired by the plurality of light reception sensors 180 (first step).
  • the light receiving sensor 180 receives, as external light, ambient light where the display device 900 is installed, and also receives sunlight directly irradiated on the display area 90.
  • the sunlight L stronger than the ambient light is directly applied to the display area 90, it becomes difficult for the observer to visually recognize the image in the irradiation area of the sunlight L.
  • the light reception information a1 to d1 acquired by the light reception sensor 180 is output to the reference value setting unit 531 and the image output setting unit 532 as shown in FIG.
  • the reference value setting unit 531 sets a reference value based on the light reception information a 1 to d 1 and outputs the reference value to the image output setting unit 532.
  • the reference value can be set as a value that is larger by a predetermined value than the received light information a1 to d1 of the display area 90 irradiated with ambient light.
  • step S102 of FIG. 16 the image output setting unit 532 determines whether the area of the part where the received light information a1 to d1 exceeding the reference value has exceeded a certain ratio with respect to the area of the display region 90. Determine whether.
  • FIG. 17 is a plan view showing a display device 900 in which sunlight L as external light is directly irradiated on the display region 90.
  • FIG. 8 when the sunlight L is not directly irradiated to the display area 90, the area of the part where the received light information a1 to d1 exceeding the reference value is obtained in step S102 is the fixed area. Since the ratio is below, the process does not proceed to step S103.
  • the sunlight L as the external light is not directly applied to the display area 90, for example, a bright and dark image display area 710 is displayed below the display area 90, An image display area 720 is displayed on the display area 90, and each is displayed with an equal area.
  • step S102 when the sunlight L is directly irradiated on a part of the display region 90 in step S102 and the area of the part where the received light information a1 to d1 exceeding the reference value is obtained exceeds the certain ratio, the step The process proceeds to S103.
  • the image output setting unit 532 sets the light / dark image display area 710 and the predetermined image display area 720 based on the light reception information a1 to d1.
  • the predetermined image display area 720 is a part of the display area 90 that has received light reception information that exceeds the reference value (that is, the direct irradiation area in which the sunlight L is directly irradiated in the display area 90. ) (That is, a relatively dark area other than the direct irradiation area in the display area 90), and set to have as large an area as possible.
  • the predetermined image 721 is a news telop, it is possible to perform one-step display with large characters that are easily recognized by an observer.
  • the image output setting unit 532 sets a light and dark image display area 710 in an area other than the predetermined image display area 720 in the display area 90 as shown in FIG.
  • the bright / dark image display area 710 is set as large as possible within a range that does not overlap the predetermined image display area 720.
  • the image output setting unit 532 detects the coordinate information of the predetermined image display area 720 by image analysis, and sets the light and dark image display area 710 in an area other than the predetermined image display area 720 (that is, an empty area). .
  • the bright and dark image display area 710 in the present embodiment is arranged over a region where the sunlight L is irradiated from a region excluding a portion of the display region 90 where light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained. That is, the main area of the light / dark image display area 710 is set in an area where light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained.
  • an image of a predetermined color or a predetermined pattern is formed in a background area other than the predetermined image display area 720 in the display area 90, and the predetermined image is detected by detecting the predetermined color or the predetermined pattern. Coordinates indicating the range of the display area 720 can be obtained.
  • the predetermined image display area 720 is provided in a relatively dark area that is not irradiated with external light and the predetermined image 721 is displayed there, it is difficult for the predetermined image 721 to be difficult to see due to external light. Further, since a light / dark image display area 710 is provided in the area irradiated with external light and the light / dark image 711 is displayed there, the light scattering liquid crystal layer in the light scattering state is irradiated with external light to clear the bright color display. The bright and dark image 711 can be displayed with good contrast.
  • the brightness of the irradiation unit 302 in the predetermined image display area 720 and the light / dark image display area 710 is controlled independently of each other so that the predetermined image in the predetermined image display area 720 and the light / dark image in the light / dark image display area 710 are appropriately Display with high brightness, and the visibility of the observer can be further enhanced.
  • the image output setting unit 532 displays the single or plural predetermined images in the predetermined image display area 720 and the single or plural images in the light / dark image display area 710. Displays the light and dark images.
  • the area of each of the plurality of light and dark images can be reduced as the priority of the light and dark images displayed in the light and dark image display area 710 decreases.
  • the area of each of the plurality of predetermined images can be reduced as the priority of the predetermined image displayed in the predetermined image display area 720 decreases.
  • the image output control unit 534 changes the size of the predetermined image according to the size of the predetermined image display area 720. That is, the image output control unit 534 arranges the predetermined image as large as possible in the predetermined image display area 720 set in a relatively dark area other than the direct irradiation area in the display area 90 as shown in FIG. As described above, the predetermined image is enlarged or reduced. Further, the image output control unit 534 changes the size of the light / dark image according to the size of the light / dark image display area 710. That is, for example, as illustrated in FIG.
  • the image output control unit 534 enlarges or reduces the light / dark image so that the light / dark image is arranged as large as possible in the light / dark image display area 710 in the display area 90. Then, the image output control unit 534 outputs the image signal 424 to the liquid crystal panel control unit 520.
  • the liquid crystal panel control unit 520 supplies a liquid crystal panel control signal created based on the image signal 424 to the gate driver 110 and the source driver 120. As a result, the predetermined image and the light and dark image respectively enlarged or reduced by the image output control unit 534 are combined and displayed on the display area 90.
  • step S105 in FIG. 16 the backlight control unit 501 controls the irradiation unit 302 of the backlight 300 in the areas A to D including the predetermined image display area 720 based on the control signal received from the image output setting unit 532. And the luminance of the irradiation unit 302 is increased. This makes it easier to visually recognize the predetermined image.
  • the image output setting unit 532 is configured to display the predetermined image display area so that the total moving distance of these images is minimized, particularly when the total number of the predetermined images and the light and dark images is three or more. It is preferable to set 720 and a bright and dark image display area 710. In this way, the observer can easily recognize each image after movement.
  • display control of a predetermined image or the like may be performed based on the light reception information acquired by the light reception sensor 180 disposed in the center portion of the display area 90.
  • the reference value setting unit 531 of the image display control unit 500 sets a reference value based on the light receiving information acquired by the light receiving sensor 180 disposed in the central portion of the display area 90, and outputs the reference value as an image. Output to the setting unit 532.
  • the image output setting unit 532 sets a predetermined image display area 720 based on the light reception information when the light reception information exceeds a reference value. Then, the predetermined image is displayed in the predetermined image display area 720 by the liquid crystal panel control unit 520 in the same manner as the above-described control. In this way, the stress due to the poor visual recognition of the observer can be reduced by the small number of light receiving sensors 180 arranged in the central portion of the display area 90.
  • the image display control unit 500 receives light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by a light reception sensor 180 serving as a predetermined reference among the plurality of light reception sensors 180, and light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by other light reception sensors 180. It is preferable to obtain a difference from d1 and control display of a predetermined image or the like based on the difference between the received light information a1 to d1.
  • the reference light receiving sensor 180 may be set in the backlight control unit 501 in advance. Further, how to control the display of a predetermined image or the like with respect to the difference between the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the reference light reception sensor 180 and the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the other light reception sensors 180 is controlled. This may be preset in the image display control unit 500. In this case, the image display control unit 500 can appropriately control the display of the predetermined image 721 and the like by accurately reflecting the intensity distribution of the external light in the display area 90.
  • the image display control unit 500 obtains the difference between the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the same light reception sensor 180 at a plurality of predetermined timings, and determines a predetermined image based on the difference between the light reception information a1 to d1. Etc. may be controlled respectively.
  • the image display control unit 500 can accurately control the display of a predetermined image or the like by accurately reflecting the amount of change over time of the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the light reception sensor 180.
  • the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the light receiving sensor 180 temporarily changes greatly. If display of a predetermined image or the like is controlled based on the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained at this time, the arrangement and size of each image change unnecessarily.
  • the image display control unit 500 continues the predetermined light reception information a1 to d1 when the constant light reception information a1 to d1 is obtained by the light reception sensor 180 for a predetermined time. Based on this, display of a predetermined image or the like is controlled.
  • the predetermined image display area 720 is set to an area excluding the part of the display area 90 where the received light information exceeding the reference value is obtained, and the main area of the light / dark image display area 710 is the above-described area. It was set in an area where received light information exceeding the reference value was obtained.
  • the scope of the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment.
  • a modified example of the bright / dark image display area 710, the predetermined image display area 720 and the display mode in the display area 90 will be described.
  • 18 to 22 are diagrams for explaining modifications of the display modes of the light and dark image display area 710 and the predetermined image display area 720, respectively.
  • the light / dark image display area 710 is set to an area in which light reception information whose main area exceeds the reference value is obtained. Therefore, the central portion 712 of the bright / dark image display area 710 slightly protrudes from the region where the received light information exceeding the reference value is obtained.
  • the predetermined image display area 720 is set so that at least a central portion 722 of the predetermined image display area 720 is located in an area excluding a portion where light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained. According to this display mode, since the observer tends to recognize the central portion of the image with priority, the central portion 722 of the predetermined image display area 720 is excluded from the portion where the received light information exceeding the reference value is obtained. By locating in the region, it is possible for the observer to recognize the predetermined image 721 without a sense of incongruity.
  • the predetermined image display area 720 is set to an area excluding a part where the main area has received light reception information exceeding the reference value. For this reason, the central portion 722 of the predetermined image display area 720 slightly protrudes from the region excluding the portion where the received light information exceeding the reference value is obtained.
  • the bright / dark image display area 710 is set so that at least the central portion 712 is located in a region where the received light information exceeding the reference value is obtained. According to this display mode, since the main area of the predetermined image display area 720 is set to an area excluding a part where light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained, the predetermined image display area 720 is set to be relatively large. Therefore, unlike the first embodiment, when the predetermined image 721 is a news telop, it is possible to perform two-stage display.
  • the predetermined image display area 720 is set to an area excluding the part where the main area has received light reception information exceeding the reference value.
  • the bright / dark image display area 710 is set in an area where light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained. According to this display mode, since all the light and dark images 711 are within the region where the received light information exceeding the reference value is obtained, the observer can accurately recognize the light and dark images 711.
  • the light and dark image display area 710 is set to an area where light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained.
  • the predetermined image display area 720 is set in an area excluding a part where light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained. Therefore, according to this display mode, it is possible to cause the observer to recognize both the bright and dark image 711 and the predetermined image 721 accurately.
  • a third area 730 is set in addition to the predetermined image display area 720 and the bright and dark image display area 710.
  • the third area 730 is an area provided in a region other than the predetermined image display area 720 and the bright / dark image display area 710 and performs display or non-display.
  • the third area 730 is displayed in the display region 90. Display variations can be increased.
  • the display mode is not particularly limited.
  • the memory liquid crystal layer 36 of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 is set in a light-transmitting state, and light is transmitted through the liquid crystal display panel 100. It is also possible to display the flashing electrical decoration to draw the viewer's attention. Further, when no image is displayed in the third area 730, it is possible to save power by the proportion of the third area 730 in the display area 90.
  • the shape of the third area 730 is not particularly limited.
  • the shape of the third area 730 is larger than the shape shown in FIG. 21 as shown in FIG. 22 as well as the shape shown in FIG. It is also possible to set.
  • power saving can be promoted by setting the area of the third area 730 large.
  • FIG. 23 is a plan view showing a display device 900 in which sunlight L as external light is directly applied to the display area 90.
  • external light is applied to the predetermined image display area 720 that displays the enlarged or reduced predetermined image 721 and the light / dark image display area 710 that displays the enlarged or reduced light / dark image 711.
  • the predetermined image display area 720 and the bright / dark image display area 710 are simply switched up and down (or left and right) for display.
  • the image display control unit 500 when the display region 90 is divided into two upper and lower regions having the same area, the light reception information a1 that exceeds the reference value by the light receiving sensor 180 in the two regions.
  • the predetermined image display area 720 is set in one area where the area of the region where d1 is obtained is small, and the light and dark image display area 710 is set in the other area.
  • steps S101 and S102 in FIG. 12 are performed as in the first embodiment.
  • the image output setting unit 532 determines, based on the obtained light reception information a1 to d1, that the area of the portion directly irradiated with sunlight L is larger in the two left and right regions.
  • the predetermined image display area 720 is arranged, the arrangement of the two upper and lower areas is switched, and the arrangement of the predetermined image display area 720 and the light and dark image display area 710 is changed together with the upper and lower two areas. .
  • the image output setting unit 532 determines the predetermined image display area 720 based on the obtained light reception information a1 to d1 so that the area of the portion directly irradiated with the sunlight L is smaller in the two left and right regions. Are arranged without changing the arrangement of the display areas.
  • step 104 in FIG. 16 is not performed, and the predetermined image 721 or the light / dark image 711 is displayed in the display area as it is.
  • the backlight control unit 501 performs backlighting in any of the upper and lower areas of the display area 90 including the predetermined image display area 720 based on the control signal received from the image output setting unit 532.
  • the irradiation unit 302 of the light 300 is controlled, and the luminance of the irradiation unit 302 is increased. As a result, the predetermined image 721 can be more visually recognized.
  • the predetermined image display area is smaller in the area where the sunlight L is directly irradiated as described above.
  • the upper and lower two areas in the display area 90 may be appropriately switched so that 720 is displayed.
  • the arrangement of the predetermined image display area 720 and the light / dark image display area 710 is appropriately changed upside down by the image display control unit 500. Since the setting is made, the control by the image display control unit 500 can be simplified and the image display can be performed.
  • the arrangement of the predetermined image display area 720 and the light / dark image display area 710 is set upside down, but the position change mode of the change is not particularly limited, and for example, not only the upside down but also the left and right Even in the replacement, it is possible to simplify the control by the image display control unit 500 and perform appropriate image display.
  • FIG. 24 is a plan view showing a display device 900 of Embodiment 5 in which sunlight L as external light having higher intensity than those of Embodiments 2 to 4 described above is directly applied to the display area 90.
  • FIG. in the fifth embodiment both the bright and dark image display area 710 and the predetermined image display area 720 are set in a relatively dark area other than the direct irradiation area of high intensity external light. That is, in the above-described second embodiment, the bright and dark image display area 710 is set in the direct irradiation area of external light, and the predetermined image display area 720 is set in the relatively dark area. However, high intensity external light is displayed in the display area.
  • both the dark image display area 710 and the predetermined image display area 720 are other than the direct irradiation area of the external light having a high intensity. Set to a relatively dark area.
  • An altitude reference value higher than the reference value of the second embodiment is determined in advance for the light reception information obtained by the light receiving sensor 180. Then, the image display control unit 500 according to the present embodiment selects a portion of the display area 90 where the light reception information a1 to d1 exceeding the altitude reference value is obtained based on the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the light reception sensor 180. Both the predetermined image display area 720 and the light / dark image display area 710 are set in the relatively dark area except for the above.
  • the image display control unit 500 can set the predetermined image display area 720 to be larger than the light and dark image display area 710 based on, for example, the priority or display content of an image to be described later, It is also possible to set the predetermined image display area 720 smaller than the light and dark image display area 710.
  • steps S101 and S102 in FIG. 16 are performed as in the second embodiment. Subsequently, in step S103, the image output setting unit 532 sets a predetermined image display area 720 and a light / dark image display area 710 based on the obtained light reception information a1 to d1.
  • the image output setting unit 532 arranges, for example, the predetermined image display area 720 relatively large in an area where the sunlight L is not directly irradiated, and the coordinate information of the predetermined image display area 720 is obtained by image analysis.
  • a bright and dark image display area 710 is set in an area other than the predetermined image display area 720 (that is, an empty area) in the area that is not irradiated with the sunlight L.
  • the predetermined image 721 and the bright / dark image 711 are enlarged or reduced by the image output control unit 534, respectively, and displayed in an area where the sunlight L is not directly irradiated.
  • the image output setting unit 532 includes a plurality of image output areas in areas other than the predetermined image display area 720 in the area where the sunlight L is not irradiated.
  • the bright and dark image display area 710 is set.
  • the image display control unit 500 converts both the predetermined image 721 and the light / dark image 711 into sunlight L. Is displayed in a relatively dark area that is not directly irradiated, so even if such strong external light is irradiated on the display area 90, information by the predetermined image 721 and information by the light and dark image 711 Can be suitably transmitted to the observer.
  • Embodiment 6 In the above-described fifth embodiment, when the sunlight L as external light having high intensity is directly applied to the display area 90, both the dark image display area 710 and the predetermined image display area 720 have high external light. A relatively dark area other than the direct irradiation area was set. However, the scope of the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment.
  • both the dark image display area 710 and the predetermined image display area 720 have high intensity. Even if a relatively dark area other than the direct irradiation area of the external light is set, the sizes of the dark image 711 and the predetermined image 721 are small. Accordingly, in the sixth embodiment, when the display area 90 is directly irradiated with sunlight L as external light having high intensity, and the area exceeds a certain ratio with respect to the area of the display area 90, the display area The display of an image at 90 is temporarily stopped.
  • the image display control unit 500 may be connected to the power source 522, for example. Then, when the area of the part where the received light information 1a to 1d exceeding the altitude reference value exceeds a certain ratio with respect to the area of the display region 90, the image display control unit 500 generates an operation stop signal. .
  • the power source 522 stops supplying power to the liquid crystal panel control unit 520, the backlight control unit 501, and the like.
  • the image display control unit 500 causes the display region 90 to be displayed when the area of the part where the received light information 1a to 1d exceeding the altitude reference value exceeds a certain ratio with respect to the area of the display region 90. The display of the image can be stopped.
  • the image display control unit 500 displays the light receiving information 1a to 1d of external light having an intensity exceeding a predetermined altitude reference value at the center of the screen in the display area 90. It is also possible to temporarily stop displaying an image in the area 90. Since the central portion of the display area 90 is easy to enter the observer's field of view, if the central portion of the display area 90 is difficult to see, it is difficult to grasp the contents of the entire display image. Therefore, the image display control unit 500 can stop displaying an image on the display area 90 when it becomes difficult to see the center of the display area 90. Thus, by displaying an image that is difficult to see, it is possible to eliminate stress on the observer and to save power for driving the display device.
  • FIGS. 25 to 32 are block diagrams of display devices that schematically show modifications of the arrangement of the light receiving sensors.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 may be arranged so that external light irradiated on the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 can be received at a plurality of positions in the display region 90.
  • the arrangement position of the light receiving sensor 180 will be exemplified.
  • the light receiving sensors 180 may be arranged in a distributed manner, for example, along a line set so as to traverse or longitudinally cross the display area 90. Thereby, the light reception information of the external light irradiated on the display area 90 can be acquired along a line set so as to traverse or cross the display area 90. In this case, for example, the brightness of the external light can be detected along a line set so as to cross or vertically cross the display area 90. In this case, the number of light receiving sensors 180 can be reduced as compared with the case where the light receiving sensors 180 are arranged for each pixel group composed of a plurality of pixels.
  • the aperture ratio decreases in the display pixel 80 in which the light receiving sensor 180 is disposed, the aperture ratio of the display pixel 80 is reduced as a whole in the display area 90 by reducing the number of the light receiving sensors 180 in this way. Since it can suppress, the luminance fall of a display image can be suppressed.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 displays along the line connecting the midpoints of at least two opposite sides of the four sides of the display area 90 as shown in FIGS. You may arrange
  • the light receiving sensor 180 may be arranged along a line connecting the midpoints of the two sides in the short direction of the rectangular display area 90.
  • the light reception information a1 to d1 of the external light in the longitudinal direction of the rectangular display area 90 can be obtained, the light reception information a1 to d1 roughly reflecting the luminance distribution of the external light that irradiates the entire display area 90 is obtained. Obtainable.
  • the line connecting the midpoints of the two sides in the short direction of the display area 90 may be disposed along the line connecting the midpoints of the two sides in the longitudinal direction of the display region 90.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 may be arranged along at least two opposite sides of the four sides of the display region 90 in the peripheral portion of the display region 90.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 when the light receiving sensor 180 is arranged at the center of the display area 90 and the brightness of the display image is lowered at the center of the display area 90, the brightness of the display image is easily recognized by the user.
  • disposing the light receiving sensor 180 at the peripheral portion of the display area 90 reduces the brightness of the display image compared to the case where the light receiving sensor 180 is disposed at the center of the display area 90. It becomes difficult to be recognized.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 can be disposed at another position in the plan view of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 may be arranged along at least one diagonal line of the display region 90.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 may be disposed at the center of each side in the peripheral portion of the display area 90.
  • the light receiving sensors 180 may be arranged at the four corners of the peripheral portion of the display area 90 as shown in FIG.
  • the display area 90 is set with areas divided into four areas A, B, C, and D.
  • the number of divisions of the display area 90 is not limited to four and can be changed as appropriate according to the application.
  • a plurality of areas A to Z obtained by dividing the display area 90 may be set corresponding to the position where the light receiving sensor 180 is disposed.
  • the irradiation unit 302 is arranged corresponding to the position of each of the areas A to Z (each light receiving sensor 180), and each of the irradiation units 302 is controlled.
  • the backlight control unit 501 can control the irradiation unit 302 for each of the areas A to Z set for each irradiation unit 302 based on the light reception information a1 to z1 obtained by the light receiving sensor 180. .
  • the display pixel 80 is provided with an opening for transmitting illumination light irradiated from the backlight 300 to the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 and the liquid crystal display panel 100 and external light irradiating the display region 90.
  • the black matrix 62 is formed in a lattice shape along a region between adjacent openings in a plan view of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200, and blocks illumination light and external light, respectively. .
  • the light receiving sensor 180 is preferably arranged inside the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 is formed with the black matrix 62 in a plan view of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200. In the region, it is preferable that the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 is disposed on the front side of the black matrix 62. In this case, the light receiving sensor 180 can be disposed in the region where the display pixel 80 is formed without covering the opening of the display pixel 80. Thereby, a decrease in the aperture ratio of the display pixel 80 can be suppressed.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 may be disposed so as to be covered with the black matrix 62 on the backlight 300 side.
  • the illumination light emitted from the backlight 300 is shielded by the black matrix 62 before being received by the light receiving sensor 180, so that the light receiving sensor 180 can obtain the received light information a1 to d1 from which the illumination light is excluded. Can do.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 may be arranged in the black matrix 62.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 may be arranged in a region where the TFT 24 and the signal line 21 are formed in a plan view of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200. Since the TFT 24 and the signal line 21 have a light shielding property, the illumination light from the backlight 300 is shielded by the TFT 24 and the signal line 21. Since the light receiving sensor 180 disposed in the region where the TFT 24 and the signal line 21 are formed is disposed in the region where the illumination light is originally shielded, the aperture ratio of the display pixel 80 is not reduced. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the luminance of the display image from being lowered by the light receiving sensor 180 being arranged.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 may be disposed on a member other than the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 may be arranged in the backlight 300.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 since the light receiving sensor 180 can be arranged in the display area 90 without covering the opening formed in the display pixel 80 of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200, a decrease in the aperture ratio of the display pixel 80 can be prevented.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 can be disposed inside the liquid crystal display panel 100, thereby suppressing a decrease in the aperture ratio of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 may be disposed between the liquid crystal display panel 100 and the backlight 300.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 since the light receiving sensor 180 is not directly provided on the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200, the liquid crystal display panel 100, or the backlight 300, the structure of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200, the liquid crystal display panel 100, or the backlight 300 is changed.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 can be provided.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 can be disposed, for example, on a light receiving sensor support member that is sandwiched between the liquid crystal display panel 100 and the backlight 300.
  • the light receiving sensor support member is preferably a transparent substrate having optical transparency, and an optical sheet sandwiched between the liquid crystal display panel 100 and the backlight 300 can also be used.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 can be disposed at a portion that cannot be disposed on the liquid crystal display panel 100, the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200, or the backlight 300. For this reason, the freedom degree of the layout of a light receiving sensor can be improved.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 is arranged on the light receiving sensor support member, a plurality of light receiving sensor support members having different arrangement patterns of the light receiving sensors 180 can be provided. Accordingly, the arrangement of the light receiving sensors 180 can be changed by simply replacing any of the plurality of light receiving sensor support members. Therefore, the position of the light receiving sensor 180 can be easily changed according to the use of the display device 900 (for a television broadcast receiver, for an information display, etc.).
  • Embodiment 8 In the above-described Embodiments 2 to 7, the light receiving sensor is provided, and the predetermined image display area and the light / dark image display area are set according to the intensity of the external light applied to the display area. However, the scope of the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. In the eighth embodiment, a predetermined image display area and a light / dark image display area are set based on priority information 423 indicating the priority of a display image.
  • the external processing device 421 has a plurality of images as data, and supplies a digital signal 424 including priority information 423 of each image to the control unit 550.
  • the control unit 550 controls the liquid crystal display panel 100, the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200, and the backlight 300 based on a digital signal including priority information 423 input from the external processing device 421.
  • the image display control unit 500 sets a bright and dark image display area and a predetermined image display area based on the priority information indicating the priority of the display image, and displays it in the display area 90.
  • the priority information of each display image is not particularly limited, but can be set by appropriately considering the necessity / importance of information for the observer, the visibility of display, the novelty of information, and the like. .
  • the display device 900 when the display device 900 is installed in a station premises, the observer pays attention to the arrival time of the train with priority, so the priority information of the light-dark image 711 as the time display image is predetermined as a news telop. It is set higher than the image 721.
  • FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a specific example in which a bright and dark image and a predetermined image are displayed in the display area in consideration of image priority information.
  • the priority information of the light and dark image 711 as the time display image is set higher than the predetermined image 721 as the news telop, the light and dark image 711 is set larger than the predetermined image 721 as shown in FIG. It is desirable to set the image display area in correspondence with the priority of the priority information.
  • the ratio of displaying an image with a higher priority than an image with a lower priority is not particularly limited, and can be set as appropriate in consideration of the priority of each image.
  • the priority information of each image can be changed depending on the time.
  • the observer is in the morning time zone (for example, 7:00 am to 9:00 am) because it is commuting to school. Gives priority to the arrival time of trains, but in the daytime hours (for example, from 11:00 am to 3:00 pm), it is used for shopping and walking, so the observer gives priority to the news over the arrival time of the train. pay attention to.
  • the priority information of the light and dark image 711 as the time display image is set higher than the priority information of the predetermined image 721 as the news telop, while in the daytime time zone, the priority information is set as the news telop.
  • the priority information of the predetermined image 721 can be set higher than the priority information of the light and dark image 711 as the time display image.
  • FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a specific example in which a bright and dark image and a predetermined image are displayed when priority information of an image is changed in different time zones.
  • the predetermined image 721 as a news telop has higher priority information than the light and dark image 711 as a time display image. It is displayed larger than 711.
  • the predetermined image 721 can be displayed in a plurality of stages such as a two-stage display as shown in FIG.
  • Embodiment 9 In the above-described eighth embodiment, the predetermined image display area and the light / dark image display area are set based on the priority information indicating the priority of the display image. However, the scope of the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. In the ninth embodiment, a predetermined image display area and a light / dark image display area are set based on image information 422 indicating the display content of the display image.
  • the external processing device 421 has a plurality of images as data, and supplies a digital signal 424 including image information 422 of each image to the control unit 550.
  • the control unit 550 controls the liquid crystal display panel 100, the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200, and the backlight 300 based on a digital signal including image information 422 input from the external processing device 421.
  • the image display control unit 500 sets a bright and dark image display area and a predetermined image display area based on the image information 422 indicating the display content of the display image, and displays it in the display area 90.
  • the image information 422 is not particularly limited, but can be set by appropriately considering, for example, the visibility of the display based on the shape or color of the displayed image itself, the novelty of the information, and the like. Considering the ease of viewing information display, for example, the news telop needs to set a relatively long time for each character to be displayed on the screen, so that the size per character is preferably relatively small. In addition, for example, a weather mark indicating tomorrow's weather is preferably set relatively large because it is difficult to distinguish it from other weather marks if the size of the symbol is small.
  • FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating a specific example in which a bright and dark image and a predetermined image are displayed in the display area in consideration of the display content of the display image. As shown in FIG. 38, the light and dark image 711 as a weather mark is set to be relatively large, and the predetermined image 721 as a news telop is set to be relatively small.
  • the predetermined image 721 as a news telop is new information
  • the bright and dark image 711 is information that has already been repeated, it is preferable to set the light and dark image 711 to be relatively small.
  • Embodiment 10 In the first embodiment described above, the illumination unit 302 of the backlight 300 corresponding to the light / dark image display area 710 is turned off, and an image composed of a combination of bright color display and dark color display is displayed on the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200.
  • the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment.
  • the entire illumination unit 302 of the backlight 300 corresponding to the light / dark image display area 710 is not turned off, but the whole is turned on dimly in a low power consumption state. Even in such a case, content display can be performed while saving power consumption in the light and dark image display area 710.
  • FIG. 39 illustrates a display mode in which the irradiation unit 302 corresponding to the portion where the dark color display is formed is turned off and the irradiation unit 302 corresponding to the portion where the bright color display is formed is turned on in the light / dark image display area 710.
  • FIG. a case where the display device 900 is configured with the three transparent substrates illustrated in FIG. 4 will be described as an example. As shown in FIG.
  • the backlight control unit 501 turns off the irradiation unit 302 of the backlight 300 corresponding to the place where the dark color display (for example, black display B) is formed on the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200.
  • the irradiation unit 302 of the backlight 300 corresponding to a place where a bright color display (for example, white display W) is formed on the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 is turned on.
  • the image display control unit 500 keeps the liquid crystal layer 26 of the liquid crystal display panel 100 in a light transmission state.
  • the irradiation unit 302 of the backlight 300 corresponding to the place where the bright color display is formed, the light of the backlight 300 is scattered by the liquid crystal molecules 38 in the random state, and scattered light is generated.
  • the contrast between the light color display and the dark color display can be enhanced by supplementing the light color display.
  • FIG. 40 is a block diagram schematically illustrating a wiring structure and a control unit of the display device 900 according to the eleventh embodiment.
  • FIG. 41 is a timing chart showing intermittent driving of the backlight.
  • the display device 900 is configured such that the backlight 300 is intermittently driven.
  • the display device 900 is intermittently driven so as to alternately switch the light-off period and the light-on period during which the backlight 300 is lit so that there is a light-out period during which the backlight 300 is turned off during the period when the image displayed in the display area 90 is switched.
  • a control unit 540 is provided.
  • the intermittent drive control unit 540 is provided as a part of the control unit 550 as shown in FIG.
  • a liquid crystal panel control signal is input from the liquid crystal panel control unit 520 to the intermittent drive control unit 540.
  • the intermittent drive control unit 540 detects an image switching period in which the display image is switched from the liquid crystal panel control signal, creates a turn-off signal based on the image switching period, and sends it to the power input unit 242.
  • the power input unit 242 stops the power supply to the irradiation unit 302 during a predetermined period in the image switching period (one frame) based on the turn-off signal. As a result, the irradiation unit 302 of the backlight 300 is controlled so that there is an extinguishing period in one frame, as shown in FIG.
  • the image display control unit 500 may control to set the predetermined image display area 720 and the like based on the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the light reception sensor 180 during the extinguishing period of the backlight 300.
  • the image display control unit 500 has a predetermined adoption period t in which the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the light reception sensor 180 is employed.
  • BL indicates lighting of the backlight.
  • DC indicates switching of images in one frame (1F). This adoption period t is determined to be the same as the turn-off period of the backlight 300.
  • the received light information a1 to d1 during the extinguishing period of the backlight 300 thus obtained does not include illumination light emitted from the backlight 300.
  • the image output setting unit 532 of the image display control unit 500 accurately reflects the external light that irradiates the display area 90 based on the light reception information that does not include illumination light, and the light and dark image display area 710 and the predetermined image display area. 720 can be set.
  • the image display control unit 500 receives the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the light reception sensor 180 during the lighting period and the light reception sensor during the extinction period.
  • the predetermined image display area 720 or the like may be set based on the difference from the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by 180.
  • the image display control unit 500 obtains the light reception information a1 to d1 of the illumination light by obtaining the difference between the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained during the lighting period and the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained during the extinguishing period. calculate. Then, the image display control unit 500 sets the predetermined image display area 720 and the like based on the calculated light reception information a1 to d1 of the illumination light and the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the light reception sensor 180.
  • the predetermined image display area 720 can be appropriately set reflecting the current brightness of the illumination light. Therefore, even if the brightness of the illumination light generated from the irradiation unit 302 changes with ambient temperature change or aging deterioration, the display of the predetermined image 721 or the like can be appropriately controlled.
  • Embodiment 12 In Embodiment 1 described above, color filter layers having different colors for each pixel are formed. However, when performing color display, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment.
  • color display is performed by mixing a dye into the memory liquid crystal layer 36.
  • 42A and 42B are diagrams illustrating an embodiment in which color display is performed by mixing a dye into the memory liquid crystal layer 36.
  • FIG. 42A shows a case where the emitted light of the mixed dye is absorbed.
  • FIG. 42B shows the case where the emitted light of the mixed pigment is irradiated to the outside.
  • the display device 900 is configured with the three transparent substrates illustrated in FIG. 4 will be described as an example.
  • the mixed dye is, for example, a green dye
  • the green light 160 when no electric field is formed with respect to the memory liquid crystal layer 36, as shown in FIG. 42A, the green light 160 is absorbed by the green dye mixed with the liquid crystal molecules and visually recognized. Although it is not emitted in the direction, the emitted light 161 other than the green light is not absorbed by the green dye, but is scattered by the green dye mixed in the liquid crystal molecules, and a display with an enlarged viewing angle can be obtained.
  • the green light 160 is emitted without being absorbed by the dye, and the emitted light 161 other than the green light is also mixed into the liquid crystal molecules. Since the green pigment is scattered and emitted without being absorbed, all incident light is emitted and becomes white light.
  • color display can be performed by mixing red, green, and blue primary color pigments for each pixel.
  • Embodiment 13 In the thirteenth embodiment, an embodiment in which the viewing angle dependency of the image of the predetermined image display area 720 is made variable will be described.
  • 43A and 43B are diagrams illustrating an embodiment in which the viewing angle dependency of an image in the predetermined image display area 720 is variable.
  • FIG. 43A shows a case where display with less visual dependency is performed.
  • FIG. 43B shows a case where a display with much visual dependency is performed.
  • a case where the display device 900 is configured with the three transparent substrates illustrated in FIG. 4 will be described as an example.
  • the liquid crystal molecules are arranged substantially parallel to the electric field by the applied electric field.
  • the light is emitted as it is.
  • display with high visual dependency display with a narrow viewing angle
  • display is performed for a small number of observers.
  • the brightness and contrast ratio can be increased.
  • the light mirror display 40 is formed to reflect the external light that has entered the memory liquid crystal layer 36 and to scatter the light within the memory liquid crystal layer 36, thereby enhancing the bright color display.
  • FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram of the display device 900 on which the reflecting mirror plate 40 is formed.
  • the reflecting mirror plate 40 is formed in a region that is not a region for forming a light transmission state in the memory liquid crystal layer 36 of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200.
  • the region that is not the region that forms the light transmission state is a region that does not contribute to the light transmission state, and is not particularly limited, but is, for example, the upper portion of the wiring on the pixel.
  • the black matrix 62 does not transmit light and therefore does not contribute to the light transmission state.
  • the region directly below is a region that is not a region that forms a light transmission state.
  • the reflecting mirror plate 40 is disposed in a region directly below the black matrix 62 and inside the front surface of the common transparent substrate 15.
  • the image display control unit 500 puts the liquid crystal layer 26 of the liquid crystal display panel 100 in a light non-transmissive state in the light / dark image display area 710.
  • the backlight control unit 501 turns off the irradiation unit 302 of the backlight 300 corresponding to the light and dark image display area 710.
  • the liquid crystal molecules 38 in the memory liquid crystal layer 36 are set in a random state, and the memory liquid crystal layer 36 of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 is changed into a light scattering state.
  • light color display for example, white display W
  • the incident light 164 that has entered the vicinity of the pixel electrode 23 without being scattered by the liquid crystal molecules 38 is reflected by the reflecting mirror plate 40 and is scattered by the liquid crystal molecules 38, thereby performing bright color display.
  • the incident light 162 is incident on the light-transmitting memory liquid crystal layer 36 and is not reflected, resulting in dark color display (for example, black display B). Thereby, it is possible to enhance the contrast ratio of the image by enhancing the bright color display.
  • Embodiment 15 >>
  • the display device 900 is configured to include the single light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 and the single liquid crystal display panel 100.
  • the scope of the present invention is such a range.
  • the present invention is not limited to the embodiment.
  • a display unit 800 is configured by including a single light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 and a single liquid crystal display panel 100.
  • the display units 800 (11) to 800 (86) are arranged in a matrix. That is, a plurality of display units 800 (11) to 800 (86) constituting the display area 90 constitute one display screen.
  • a light / dark image display area 710 for displaying a light / dark image 711 and a predetermined image display area 720 for displaying a predetermined image 721 are formed.
  • a plurality of light receiving sensors 180 are provided in a distributed manner. For example, a predetermined number of light receiving sensors 180 are arranged for each of the display units 800 (11) to 800 (86).
  • the display device 900 further includes a control unit 550 that controls the display area 90. Signals are input to the control unit 550 from the light receiving sensor 180 and the external processing device 421.
  • the external processing device 421 is constituted by, for example, a plurality of personal computers (PCs) operated by an administrator of the display device 900, and has image information 422 and priority information 423, respectively.
  • the control unit 550 is an electronic processing device, and includes a liquid crystal panel control unit 520, a backlight control unit 501, a signal input unit 521, a power source 522, and an image display control unit 500.
  • the control unit 550 is configured to control each of the display units 800 (11) to 800 (86) based on signals input from the light receiving sensor 180 and the external processing device 421.
  • the image display controller 500 individually drives each of the display units 800 (11) to 800 (86). That is, the image display control unit 500 drives each light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 individually, and for example, driving power for the alignment of the memory liquid crystal layer 36 is individually controlled. In addition, the image display control unit 500 also drives each liquid crystal display panel 100 individually, and for example, driving power for alignment of the liquid crystal layer 26 is individually controlled.
  • each light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 and each liquid crystal display panel 100 can be individually controlled, in FIG. 45, for example, display units 800 (12), 800 (13), 800 (14), 800 ( 15), 800 (22), 800 (23), 800 (24), 800 (25), 800 (32), 800 (33), 800 (34), and 800 (35) are dark and light colors.
  • a bright and dark image consisting of display is displayed, and for example, 800 (61), 800 (62), 800 (63), 800 (64), 800 (65), 800 (66), 800 (71), 800 (72 ), 800 (73), 800 (74), 800 (75), and 800 (76) make the light-scattering liquid crystal layer of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 in a light-transmitting state. Image to view the.
  • display units 800 (11), 800 (16), 800 (21), 800 (26), 800 (31), 800 (36), 800 (41), 800 (42), 800 (43), 800 (44), 800 (45), 800 (46), 800 (51), 800 (52), 800 (53), 800 (54), 800 (55), 800 (56), 800 (81), 800 (82), 800 (83), 800 (84), 800 (85), and 800 (86) make the light-scattering liquid crystal layer of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 in a light-transmitting state, thereby saving power consumption.
  • the driving of the liquid crystal display panel 100 is stopped for the purpose of the conversion.
  • each display unit 800 can be individually controlled, even when the display device 900 is enlarged, it is possible to save the driving power. It is also possible to reduce the influence of the frame, which is a non-display portion around the display area 90.
  • FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining a state in which a bright / dark image display area 710 and a predetermined image display area 720 are set when external light is irradiated on the display area 90.
  • a reference value is predetermined for the light reception information obtained by each light reception sensor 180 arranged in each display unit 800. Then, as shown in FIG. 46, when the light receiving information exceeding the reference value is obtained by the light receiving sensor 180, the image display control unit 500 displays the light / dark image display area 710 in the display area 90 based on the light receiving information.
  • a predetermined image display area 720 is set, a light / dark image 711 is displayed in the light / dark image display area 710, and a predetermined image 721 is displayed in the predetermined image display area 720.
  • the third area 730 can be set in an area other than the bright and dark image display area 710 and the predetermined image display area 720 in the display area 90.
  • variations in display in the display area 90 can be increased.
  • display other than the bright and dark image 711 and the predetermined image 721 or non-display of the image can be performed.
  • the ratio of the third area 730 in the display area 90 Only power saving is possible. Further, since each light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 and each liquid crystal display panel 100 can be individually controlled, in FIG.
  • display units 800 (11), 800 (16), 800 (26), 800 ( 31), 800 (36), 800 (41), 800 (42), 800 (43), 800 (44), 800 (45), 800 (46), 800 (51), 800 (52), 800 ( 53), 800 (54), 800 (55), and 800 (56) make the light-scattering liquid crystal layer of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 in a light-transmitting state, thereby reducing the power consumption.
  • the driving of 100 is stopped, and thus it is possible to save driving power.
  • a plurality of display units 800 By combining a plurality of display units 800 to form a single display screen as in this embodiment, for example, an information display or building used as an information transmission medium such as a signboard, an advertisement, or a sign installed outdoors A large display device such as a board display can be configured.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 is provided in each display unit 800, and the predetermined image display area 720 and the light / dark image display area 710 are set based on the light receiving information obtained by the light receiving sensor.
  • the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and the predetermined image display area 720 and the bright / dark image display area 710 can be set based on priority information indicating the priority of the display image. Also, it is possible to set the predetermined image display area 720 and the light / dark image display area 710 based on the display content of the display image.
  • FIG. 47 is a block diagram schematically showing the display module 920. As shown in FIG. When the display device 900 is manufactured, the display module 920 is manufactured in the manufacturing process. The display module 920 is disposed to face the backlight 300 to constitute the display device 900, and as shown in FIG. 47, the display device 900 having a display area 90 in which a plurality of pixels are disposed, and a plurality of light receiving sensors. 180, a calculation unit 112, and an output terminal 114. The display device 900 is configured to be able to simultaneously display a plurality of images in the display area 90.
  • the light receiving sensors 180 are distributed in the display area 90 so as to receive external light emitted from the opposite side of the backlight 300 to the display area 90. Based on the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the light receiving sensor, the arithmetic unit 112 creates a control signal for controlling graphic display, illumination light in an area including the light / dark image display area 710 and the predetermined image display area 720, and the like. .
  • the output terminal 114 outputs the control signal created by the calculation unit 112.
  • the display module 920 including the image display control unit 500 can be created by connecting the image display control unit 500 to the output terminal 114.
  • the image display control unit 500 has predetermined reference values for the received light information a1 to d1 obtained by the light receiving sensor 180, and the received light information a1 to d1 exceeding the reference value is obtained by the received light sensor 180. If this is the case, based on the received light information a1 to d1, a bright / dark image display area 710 and a predetermined image display area 720 are set in the display area 90, a bright / dark image 711 is displayed in the bright / dark image display area 710, and A predetermined image 721 is displayed in the predetermined image display area 720.
  • the liquid crystal display panel 100 is used as the image display panel.
  • the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and examples of the image display panel include an organic EL display panel and an inorganic EL display panel.
  • Various image display panels in which display elements are formed on a pair of glass substrates and the pair of glass substrates are arranged to face each other can be used as in a plasma display panel.
  • the usage example of the display device 900 according to the above embodiment is not limited to digital signage.
  • a liquid crystal television, a personal computer, an electronic book, a digital still camera, a video tape recorder It can be suitably used as image display means for car navigation devices, calculators, electronic notebooks, word processors, workstations, videophones, POS terminals and the like.
  • the display device can display information that can be sufficiently used as an advertisement / identification medium even in a power-saving state, it can be suitably used for advertisement display such as digital signage.

Abstract

A display device that can display information and function adequately as an advertising/identification medium even when in a power-saving state. Said display device is provided with: a scattering liquid-crystal display panel (200) comprising a memory liquid-crystal layer (36) sandwiched between transparent substrates; an image display panel (100) that forms a prescribed image; and an image display control unit (500). Said image display control unit sets the following areas in a display region (90): a light/dark image display area (710) in which a dark color is displayed by setting prescribed parts of the memory liquid-crystal layer (36) to a light-transmitting state and a light color is displayed by setting the rest of the memory liquid-crystal layer (36) to a light-scattering state, thereby displaying a light/dark image (711) comprising a combination of said dark color and light color; and a prescribed-image display area (720) in which the memory liquid-crystal layer (36) is set to a light-transmitting state, thereby displaying, through the scattering liquid-crystal display panel (200), the prescribed image (721) formed by the image display panel (100).

Description

表示装置、表示パネル、表示モジュール、画像表示システム及び画像表示方法Display device, display panel, display module, image display system, and image display method
 本発明は、デジタルサイネージ等に使用される表示装置、表示パネル、表示モジュール、画像表示システム及び画像表示方法に関し、特に省電力状態でも宣伝・識別機能を発揮できる表示装置、表示パネル、表示モジュール、画像表示システム及び画像表示方法に関する。 The present invention relates to a display device, a display panel, a display module, an image display system, and an image display method used for digital signage and the like. The present invention relates to an image display system and an image display method.
 近年、デジタル技術の発展に伴い、屋外や店舗等でハイビジョン画質等の高画質の映像を画像表示パネルのディスプレイで再生することにより宣伝を行う、特許文献1及び2に示すようなデジタルサイネージと呼ばれるシステムが存在する。 In recent years, with the development of digital technology, it is called digital signage as shown in Patent Documents 1 and 2, which advertises by playing high-quality video such as high-definition image quality on the display of the image display panel outdoors or in stores. System exists.
 デジタルサイネージでは、ネットワーク等を使うことにより画像表示パネルに動画や静止画を配信し表示することにより、広告配信等を行うことができる。このデジタルサイネージのディスプレイには、薄型、軽量、低消費電力という利点があるので、画像表示パネルとしては例えば液晶表示パネルがよく使われる。 Digital signage can distribute advertisements and the like by distributing and displaying moving images and still images on an image display panel using a network or the like. Since this digital signage display has the advantages of being thin, light and low power consumption, for example, a liquid crystal display panel is often used as an image display panel.
 しかし、一般的なデジタルサイネージシステムでは、広告配信を行っていない場合は、消費電力の省力化のため画像表示パネルを電源オフ状態にして何も表示しない。そのため画像表示パネルのディスプレイに情報表示がなされておらず宣伝、広告機能が不十分である。 However, in a general digital signage system, when advertisement distribution is not performed, nothing is displayed with the image display panel turned off to save power consumption. Therefore, no information is displayed on the display of the image display panel, and the advertising and advertising functions are insufficient.
 そこで画像表示パネルが省電力状態のときでも、ディスプレイに所定の文字や絵、模様等を表示しておくことができるように、液晶を挟持した一対の基板を備え、その一対の基板に光反射領域及び光透過領域を有するサブ画素が複数形成された表示領域を有している液晶表示装置が特許文献3に記載されている。 Therefore, even when the image display panel is in a power saving state, a pair of substrates sandwiching liquid crystal is provided so that predetermined characters, pictures, patterns, etc. can be displayed on the display, and light is reflected on the pair of substrates. Patent Document 3 discloses a liquid crystal display device having a display region in which a plurality of subpixels each having a region and a light transmission region are formed.
 この液晶表示装置は、複数のサブ画素の各々の光反射領域及び光透過領域が互いに独立して駆動するように構成されており、電源オフ時に、光反射領域を一旦直流駆動して特定画像を表示した後に電源オフ状態とすることで、省電力状態でもディスプレイに特定画像が継続して表示される。 This liquid crystal display device is configured such that the light reflection region and the light transmission region of each of the plurality of sub-pixels are driven independently of each other. When the power is turned off, the light reflection region is temporarily DC-driven to display a specific image. By displaying the power off after the display, the specific image is continuously displayed on the display even in the power saving state.
特開2002-125052号公報Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2002-125052 特開2001-209705号公報JP 2001-209705 A 特開2009-229967号公報JP 2009-229967 A
 しかし、この液晶表示装置では、電源オフ時にディスプレイに同一の画像が継続して表示されるにすぎないので、宣伝・広告等の情報伝達媒体として十分に利用できるものではない。 However, in this liquid crystal display device, since the same image is continuously displayed on the display when the power is turned off, it cannot be sufficiently used as an information transmission medium for advertisements and advertisements.
 本発明はかかる問題点に鑑みてなされたものであって、省電力状態でも、宣伝・識別媒体として十分に利用できる情報表示を可能とする表示装置、表示パネル、表示モジュール、画像表示システム及び画像表示方法を提供することを目的とする。 The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and a display device, a display panel, a display module, an image display system, and an image capable of displaying information that can be sufficiently used as an advertisement / identification medium even in a power saving state. An object is to provide a display method.
 上記目的を達成するために、本発明では、光散乱性液晶層を透明基板間に挟持して構成された光散乱性液晶表示パネルと、その光散乱性液晶表示パネルの背面側に配置され、画像を形成する画像表示パネルとを有して表示装置を構成し、表示装置の表示面の表示領域に、明色表示及び暗色表示の組み合わせから成る明暗画像を表示する明暗画像表示エリアと、画像表示パネルにて形成される所定画像を表示する所定画像表示エリアと、を有するように設定する。ここで、明色表示とは、明るさの度合いが高い色彩表示のことであり、特に限定されるものではないが、例えば白、クリーム色、薄い水色、黄、銀、明るいグレー等の色調が明るい高明度の有彩色又は無彩色の表示である。また、暗色表示とは、明るさの度合いが低い色彩表示のことであり、特に限定されるものではないが、例えば黒色の他、褐色、紺色、深緑色、臙脂色等の色調が暗い低明度の有彩色又は無彩色の表示である。また、ここで、所定画像とは、画像表示パネルにて形成される所定の画像であり、文字、図形及び記号の少なくとも何れか一つを含む画像であり、動画及び静止画のいずれも含み、特に限定されるものではないが、例えばニューステロップ、テレビ画像、音楽動画、CM動画、映画動画、又は、災害時の避難指示画像等である。 In order to achieve the above object, in the present invention, a light scattering liquid crystal display panel configured by sandwiching a light scattering liquid crystal layer between transparent substrates, and disposed on the back side of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel, A display device having an image display panel for forming an image, and a light / dark image display area for displaying a light / dark image composed of a combination of light color display and dark color display in a display area of a display surface of the display device; A predetermined image display area for displaying a predetermined image formed on the display panel. Here, the light color display is a color display with a high degree of brightness, and is not particularly limited, but for example, white, cream, light cyan, yellow, silver, light gray, etc. It is a bright, bright, chromatic or achromatic display. The dark color display is a color display with a low degree of brightness, and is not particularly limited. For example, in addition to black, brown, amber, dark green, oil color, etc. It is a display of chromatic or achromatic color. Here, the predetermined image is a predetermined image formed on the image display panel, is an image including at least one of characters, figures, and symbols, includes both moving images and still images, Although not particularly limited, for example, a news telop, a television image, a music movie, a CM movie, a movie movie, or an evacuation instruction image at the time of a disaster.
 具体的には、本発明の第1の観点に係る表示装置は、透明基板間に光散乱性液晶層が挟持されてなる光散乱性液晶表示パネルと、前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルの背面側に配置され、画像を形成する画像表示パネルと、を備えた表示装置であって、表示面の表示領域に、前記光散乱性液晶層を光透過状態にする暗色表示、及び、該暗色表示と異なる箇所にて光散乱性液晶層を光散乱状態にする明色表示を組み合わせることにより、明暗画像を表示する明暗画像表示エリアと、前記光散乱性液晶層を光透過状態とすることにより、前記画像表示パネルにて形成される所定画像を前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルを介して表示する所定画像表示エリアと、が設定されるように制御する画像表示制御部を備えたことを特徴とする。 Specifically, the display device according to the first aspect of the present invention includes a light scattering liquid crystal display panel in which a light scattering liquid crystal layer is sandwiched between transparent substrates, and a back side of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel. An image display panel arranged to form an image, and a dark color display for bringing the light-scattering liquid crystal layer into a light-transmitting state in a display area of the display surface, and the dark color display. By combining a bright color display in which the light scattering liquid crystal layer is in a light scattering state at different locations, a light / dark image display area for displaying a light / dark image, and the light scattering liquid crystal layer in a light transmissive state, An image display control unit that controls to set a predetermined image display area for displaying a predetermined image formed on the image display panel via the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel is provided.
 本発明の構成によれば、所定画像表示エリアに所定画像を表示することにより宣伝・識別機能を発揮させつつ、明暗画像表示エリアにて省電力状態にて明暗画像を表示するので、省電力状態でも、宣伝・識別媒体として十分に利用できる情報表示が可能となる。 According to the configuration of the present invention, the bright / dark image is displayed in the power saving state in the light / dark image display area while displaying the predetermined image in the predetermined image display area, and the advertisement / identification function is exhibited. However, it is possible to display information that can be used sufficiently as an advertisement / identification medium.
 また、前記表示装置の表示面の表示領域に照射された外部光を受光する複数の受光センサを備え、前記画像表示制御部は、前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に対して基準値が予め定められており、前記基準値を上回る受光情報が前記受光センサによって得られたときに、当該受光情報に基づいて、前記所定画像表示エリアと前記明暗画像表示エリアとを設定することが好ましい。ここで、外部光とは、表示装置以外によって照射される光を意味する。例えば、表示装置が室内に置かれている場合でも、室内照明によって照射された光か、室外からの光であるかを問わない。 In addition, the image display control unit includes a plurality of light receiving sensors that receive external light applied to the display area of the display surface of the display device, and the image display control unit sets a reference value in advance for the light receiving information obtained by the light receiving sensor. It is preferable that the predetermined image display area and the bright and dark image display area are set based on the light reception information when the light reception information that is determined and exceeds the reference value is obtained by the light reception sensor. Here, the external light means light emitted from other than the display device. For example, even when the display device is placed indoors, it does not matter whether the light is emitted by indoor lighting or from outside the room.
 この構成によれば、外部光が照射されていない比較的暗い領域に所定画像表示エリアを設けてそこに所定画像を表示するので、外部光により所定画像が見難くなりにくい。更に、外部光が照射されている領域に明暗画像を表示するため、光散乱状態の光散乱性液晶層にて明色表示がクリアに表示され、コントラスト良く明暗画像を表示できる。 According to this configuration, since the predetermined image display area is provided in a relatively dark area where no external light is irradiated and the predetermined image is displayed there, it is difficult for the predetermined image to be difficult to see due to the external light. Further, since the bright and dark image is displayed in the region irradiated with the external light, the bright color display is clearly displayed on the light scattering liquid crystal layer in the light scattering state, and the bright and dark image can be displayed with high contrast.
 また、前記画像表示制御部は、前記明暗画像表示エリアの大きさに応じて前記明暗画像の大きさを変更することが好ましい。この構成によれば、変更された明暗画像表示エリアの大きさに対応させて明暗画像の大きさが変更されるので、適切に明暗画像を観察者に表示することが可能となる。 Further, it is preferable that the image display control unit changes the size of the light / dark image according to the size of the light / dark image display area. According to this configuration, since the size of the light / dark image is changed according to the changed size of the light / dark image display area, the light / dark image can be appropriately displayed to the observer.
 また、前記画像表示制御部は、前記所定画像表示エリアの大きさに応じて前記所定画像の大きさを変更することが好ましい。この構成によれば、変更された所定画像表示エリアの大きさに対応させて所定画像の大きさが変更されるので、適切に所定画像を観察者に表示することが可能となる。 Further, it is preferable that the image display control unit changes the size of the predetermined image according to the size of the predetermined image display area. According to this configuration, since the size of the predetermined image is changed according to the changed size of the predetermined image display area, the predetermined image can be appropriately displayed to the observer.
 また、前記画像表示制御部は、前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に基づいて、前記表示領域のうち前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた部位を除いた領域に、前記所定画像表示エリアの主領域を設定することが可能である。この構成によれば、外部光が照射されていない比較的暗い領域に、所定画像の主領域を表示できるので、ほとんどの所定画像を観察者に表示することが可能となる。ここで、前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた部位を除いた領域に、所定画像表示エリアの主領域を設定するとは、所定画像表示エリアの大半の領域が前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた部位を除いた領域に属し、所定画像の認識が観察者に可能であることをいい、特に限定されるものではないが、例えば、所定画像表示エリアの領域の70%~99%、好ましくは80%~99%、より好ましくは90%~99%が前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた部位を除いた領域に属していることをいう。 In addition, the image display control unit may include the predetermined image display area in an area excluding a part in the display area where the received light information exceeding the reference value is obtained based on the received light information obtained by the light receiving sensor. It is possible to set the main area. According to this configuration, since the main area of the predetermined image can be displayed in a relatively dark area that is not irradiated with external light, most of the predetermined image can be displayed to the observer. Here, when the main area of the predetermined image display area is set in an area excluding the part where the light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained, the light reception information in which most of the predetermined image display area exceeds the reference value is set. It means that it belongs to the area excluding the obtained part and the observer can recognize the predetermined image. Although not particularly limited, for example, 70% to 99% of the area of the predetermined image display area, Preferably 80% to 99%, more preferably 90% to 99%, belongs to a region excluding a region where light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained.
 また、前記画像表示制御部は、前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に基づいて、前記表示領域のうち前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた部位を除いた領域に、少なくとも前記所定画像表示エリアの中央部を位置するように設定することが可能である。観察者の注意力は画像の中央部に向かう傾向があるところ、この構成によれば、外部光が照射されていない比較的暗い領域に、所定画像の中央部を表示できるので、見易い所定画像を観察者に表示することが可能となる。 Further, the image display control unit is configured to display at least the predetermined image in an area excluding a part of the display area where light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained based on light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor. It is possible to set so that the center part of an area is located. The observer's attention tends to go to the center of the image. According to this configuration, the center of the predetermined image can be displayed in a relatively dark area not irradiated with external light. It can be displayed to the observer.
 また、前記画像表示制御部は、前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に基づいて、前記表示領域のうち前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた部位を除いた領域に、前記所定画像表示エリアを設定することが可能である。この構成によれば、外部光が照射されていない比較的暗い領域に所定画像を表示できるので、所定画像を正確に観察者に表示することが可能となる。 In addition, the image display control unit may include the predetermined image display area in an area excluding a part in the display area where the received light information exceeding the reference value is obtained based on the received light information obtained by the light receiving sensor. Can be set. According to this configuration, since the predetermined image can be displayed in a relatively dark area where no external light is irradiated, the predetermined image can be accurately displayed to the observer.
 また、前記画像表示制御部は、前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に基づいて、前記表示領域のうち前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた領域に、前記明暗画像表示エリアの主領域を設定することが可能である。この構成によれば、基準値を上回る領域に、明暗画像の主領域を表示できるので、ほとんどの明暗画像をコントラスト良く観察者に表示することが可能となる。ここで、前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた領域に、明暗画像表示エリアの主領域を設定するとは、明暗画像表示エリアの大半の領域が前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた領域に属し、明暗画像の認識が観察者に可能であることをいい、特に限定されるものではないが、例えば、明暗画像表示エリアの領域の70%~99%、好ましくは80%~99%、より好ましくは90%~99%が前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた領域に属していることをいう。 Further, the image display control unit sets the main area of the bright and dark image display area in an area in the display area where the received light information exceeding the reference value is obtained based on the received light information obtained by the light receiving sensor. It is possible to set. According to this configuration, since the main area of the bright and dark image can be displayed in an area that exceeds the reference value, most of the bright and dark images can be displayed to the observer with good contrast. Here, setting the main region of the light / dark image display area in the region where the light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained means that the region where the light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained in most regions of the light / dark image display area And that the observer can recognize a bright and dark image, and is not particularly limited. For example, 70% to 99%, preferably 80% to 99% of the bright and dark image display area, More preferably, it means that 90% to 99% belongs to a region where received light information exceeding the reference value is obtained.
 また、前記画像表示制御部は、前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に基づいて、前記表示領域のうち前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた領域に、前記明暗画像表示エリアの中央部を設定することが可能である。観察者の注意力は画像の中央部に向かう傾向があるところ、この構成によれば、基準値を上回る明るい領域に、明暗画像の中央部を表示できるので、見易い明暗画像を観察者に表示することが可能となる。 Further, the image display control unit places a central portion of the light / dark image display area in an area where the light receiving information exceeding the reference value is obtained in the display area based on the light receiving information obtained by the light receiving sensor. It is possible to set. Since the observer's attention tends to go to the center of the image, according to this configuration, the center of the light / dark image can be displayed in a bright area that exceeds the reference value, so that an easy-to-see light / dark image is displayed to the observer. It becomes possible.
 また、前記画像表示制御部は、前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に基づいて、前記表示領域のうち前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた領域に、前記明暗画像表示エリアを設定することが可能である。この構成によれば、外部光が照射されている領域に明暗画像を表示できるので、明暗画像の全体をコントラスト良く観察者に表示することが可能となる。 Further, the image display control unit sets the light / dark image display area in a region where light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained in the display region based on light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor. Is possible. According to this configuration, since the bright and dark image can be displayed in the area irradiated with external light, the entire bright and dark image can be displayed to the observer with good contrast.
 また、前記画像表示制御部は、前記表示領域を面積が互いに等しい左右又は上下の2つの領域に分けた場合に、前記2つの領域のうち前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた部位の面積が小さい一方の領域に前記所定画像表示エリアを設定する一方、他方の領域に前記明暗画像表示エリアを設定することが可能である。 In addition, when the image display control unit divides the display area into two areas of right and left or upper and lower areas that are equal to each other, the area of the portion of the two areas where the received light information exceeding the reference value is obtained. It is possible to set the predetermined image display area in one area having a small size and set the bright and dark image display area in the other area.
 この構成によれば、基準値を上回る外部光が表示領域に照射されたときに、画像表示制御部によって所定画像表示エリア及び明暗画像表示エリアの配置を適宜、左右又は上下入れ替えて設定するようにしたので、画像表示制御部による制御を簡単にして観察者に画像を表示することができる。 According to this configuration, when the display area is irradiated with external light that exceeds the reference value, the arrangement of the predetermined image display area and the light and dark image display area is appropriately switched by setting the left and right or up and down positions by the image display control unit. Therefore, the control by the image display control unit can be simplified and an image can be displayed to the observer.
 また、前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に対して前記基準値よりも高い高度基準値が予め定められており、前記高度基準値を上回る受光情報が前記受光センサによって得られたときに、前記画像表示制御部は、当該受光情報に基づいて、前記表示領域のうち前記高度基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた部位を除いた領域に、前記所定画像表示エリア及び前記明暗画像表示エリアを設定することが可能である。 Further, an altitude reference value higher than the reference value is predetermined for the light receiving information obtained by the light receiving sensor, and when the light receiving information exceeding the altitude reference value is obtained by the light receiving sensor, The image display control unit sets the predetermined image display area and the light / dark image display area in an area excluding a part of the display area where the received light information exceeding the altitude reference value is obtained based on the received light information. Is possible.
 強度が高い外部光が表示領域に照射されている場合は、その外部光の直接照射領域に明暗画像表示エリアを設定すると、明暗画像が見えにくくなる可能性があるが、この構成によれば、強度が高い外部光が表示領域に直接に照射されている場合、暗画像表示エリアと所定画像表示エリアとを共に、強度が高い外部光の直接照射領域以外の比較的暗い領域に設定するので、暗画像表示エリア及び所定画像表示エリアのいずれも観察者に的確に表示することが可能となる。 When external light with high intensity is irradiated on the display area, setting a light / dark image display area in the direct light irradiation area of the external light may make it difficult to see the light / dark image. When external light with high intensity is directly irradiated onto the display area, both the dark image display area and the predetermined image display area are set to a relatively dark area other than the direct irradiation area with high intensity external light. Both the dark image display area and the predetermined image display area can be accurately displayed to the observer.
 また、前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に対して前記基準値よりも高い高度基準値が予め定められており、前記高度基準値を上回る受光情報が前記受光センサによって得られる面積が表示領域の面積に対して一定の割合を上回った場合、前記画像表示制御部は、前記表示領域に画像を表示することを一時的に停止させることも可能である。 Also, an altitude reference value higher than the reference value is predetermined for the light receiving information obtained by the light receiving sensor, and the area where the light receiving information exceeding the altitude reference value is obtained by the light receiving sensor is the display area. In a case where a certain ratio is exceeded with respect to the area, the image display control unit can temporarily stop displaying an image in the display area.
 強度が高い外部光が表示領域に直接に照射され、その面積が表示領域の面積に対して一定の割合を上回った場合、仮に、暗画像表示エリアと所定画像表示エリアとを共に比較的暗い領域に設定したとしても、暗画画像及び所定画像の画像サイズは小さいものとなってしまうが、この構成によれば、宣伝・識別機能が十分ではない画像を表示しないことで表示装置の駆動用電源の消費を節約させることができる。 If external light with high intensity is directly irradiated onto the display area and the area exceeds a certain ratio with respect to the area of the display area, the dark image display area and the predetermined image display area are both relatively dark areas. Even if it is set, the image size of the dark image and the predetermined image will be small. However, according to this configuration, the power supply for driving the display device is prevented by not displaying an image with insufficient advertising / identification function. Can save consumption.
 また、前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に対して前記基準値よりも高い高度基準値が予め定められており、前記表示領域の中央部分において、前記高度基準値を上回る受光情報が前記受光センサによって得られたときに、前記画像表示制御部は、前記表示領域に画像を表示することを一時的に停止させることも可能である。 In addition, an altitude reference value higher than the reference value is predetermined for the light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor, and light reception information exceeding the altitude reference value is received in the center portion of the display area. The image display control unit can temporarily stop displaying an image in the display area.
 表示領域の中心部は観察者の視界に入りやすいので、表示領域の中心部が見難くなると、表示画像全体の内容を把握するのが困難になりやすいが、この構成によれば、画像表示制御部は、表示領域の中心部が見難くなった際に表示領域に画像を表示するのを停止させるので、見難い画像を表示することによる観察者のストレスを抑制できる。 Since the center of the display area is easy to enter the viewer's field of view, if it becomes difficult to see the center of the display area, it is difficult to grasp the contents of the entire display image. Since the unit stops displaying an image in the display area when it becomes difficult to see the center of the display area, it is possible to suppress the stress of the observer due to the display of the difficult-to-view image.
 また、前記画像表示制御部は、予め定められた時間に継続して、前記基準値を上回る受光情報が前記受光センサによって得られた場合に、当該受光情報に基づいて、前記所定画像表示エリアと前記明暗画像表示エリアとを設定することが可能である。 Further, the image display control unit continues the predetermined time and receives the light receiving information exceeding the reference value by the light receiving sensor, based on the light receiving information, the predetermined image display area. The bright and dark image display area can be set.
 例えば表示装置の前を人が一瞬だけ通行する等によって、表示領域を照射する外部光が一時的に遮られると、受光センサによって得られる受光情報が一時的に変化し、このときに得られた受光情報に基づいて画像表示を制御すると、画像表示の変更頻度が高まり画像表示がちらつくことになるが、この構成によれば、画像表示制御部は、予め定められた時間に継続して、一定の受光情報が受光センサによって得られた場合に、当該一定の受光情報に基づいて画像表示を制御するので、画像表示のちらつきが生じにくい。 For example, when external light that illuminates the display area is temporarily interrupted, for example, when a person passes in front of the display device for a moment, the light reception information obtained by the light receiving sensor temporarily changes, and is obtained at this time. When the image display is controlled based on the light reception information, the frequency of changing the image display increases and the image display flickers. According to this configuration, the image display control unit continues to be constant at a predetermined time. When the received light information is obtained by the light receiving sensor, the image display is controlled on the basis of the fixed received light information, so that the flickering of the image display hardly occurs.
 また、前記受光センサは、前記表示領域に分散して配置されていることが好ましい。この構成によれば表示領域の種々の場所にて外部光の強度を探知することが可能となり、より精度よく制御できる。 Further, it is preferable that the light receiving sensors are arranged in a dispersed manner in the display area. According to this configuration, it is possible to detect the intensity of external light at various locations in the display area, and control can be performed with higher accuracy.
 また、前記受光センサは、前記液晶パネルの平面視において前記画素が形成された領域に各々配置されていることも可能である。この構成によれば各画素にて正確に外部光の強度を探知することが可能となる。 In addition, the light receiving sensors may be arranged in regions where the pixels are formed in a plan view of the liquid crystal panel. According to this configuration, it is possible to accurately detect the intensity of external light at each pixel.
 また、前記受光センサは、前記表示領域を横断又は縦断するように設定された線に沿って分散して配置されていることも可能である。この構成によれば、表示領域を横断又は縦断するように設定された線に沿って外部光の明るさを検知でき、受光センサの配置数を減らすことができる。 Further, the light receiving sensors may be distributed along a line set so as to traverse or longitudinally cross the display area. According to this configuration, the brightness of the external light can be detected along a line set so as to traverse or vertically cross the display area, and the number of light receiving sensors can be reduced.
 また、前記表示領域は矩形状であり、前記受光センサは、前記表示領域の四辺のうち少なくとも対向した二辺の各中点を結ぶ線に沿って前記表示領域に配置されていることも可能である。この構成によれば、表示領域全体を照射する外部光の輝度分布を大まかに反映した受光情報を得ることができる。 The display area may be rectangular, and the light receiving sensor may be arranged in the display area along a line connecting the midpoints of at least two opposite sides of the four sides of the display area. is there. According to this configuration, it is possible to obtain light reception information that roughly reflects the luminance distribution of the external light that irradiates the entire display area.
 また、前記表示領域は矩形状であり、前記受光センサは、前記表示領域の四辺のうち少なくとも対向した二辺に沿った前記表示領域の周縁部に配置されていることも可能である。この構成によれば、表示領域の中心部に受光センサを配置した場合と比べて、開口率の低下を低減できるから、表示画像の輝度低下がユーザに認知されにくくなる。 Further, the display area may be rectangular, and the light receiving sensor may be disposed on a peripheral portion of the display area along at least two opposite sides of the four sides of the display area. According to this configuration, since a decrease in the aperture ratio can be reduced as compared with the case where the light receiving sensor is arranged at the center of the display area, a decrease in luminance of the display image is not easily recognized by the user.
 また、前記表示領域は矩形状であり、前記受光センサは、前記表示領域の対角線の少なくとも一方に沿って配置されていることも可能である。この構成によっても、表示領域全体を照射する外部光の輝度分布を大まかに反映した受光情報を得ることができる。 The display area may be rectangular, and the light receiving sensor may be disposed along at least one of the diagonal lines of the display area. Also with this configuration, it is possible to obtain light reception information that roughly reflects the luminance distribution of the external light that irradiates the entire display region.
 また、表示画像の優先度を示す優先情報が表示画像ごとに予め定められており、前記画像表示制御部は、当該優先情報に基づいて、前記所定画像表示エリアと前記明暗画像表示エリアとを設定することも可能である。 Further, priority information indicating the priority of the display image is predetermined for each display image, and the image display control unit sets the predetermined image display area and the light and dark image display area based on the priority information. It is also possible to do.
 この構成によれば、表示画像の優先情報に基づいて所定画像表示エリアと明暗画像表示エリアとを設定するため、観察者にとって望ましい情報を的確に表示することが可能となる。 According to this configuration, since the predetermined image display area and the light / dark image display area are set based on the priority information of the display image, it is possible to accurately display information desirable for the observer.
 また、前記優先情報は、時刻に依存してその優先度が変更されることが好ましい。この構成によれば、例えばリアルタイムに表示画像の優先情報を変更させることが可能となるので、観察者にとって望ましい情報をより的確に表示することが可能となる。 Further, it is preferable that the priority of the priority information is changed depending on time. According to this configuration, it is possible to change the priority information of the display image in real time, for example, and thus it is possible to display information desirable for the observer more accurately.
 また、前記画像表示制御部は、表示画像の表示内容に基づいて、前記所定画像表示エリアと前記明暗画像表示エリアとを設定することも可能である。 Further, the image display control unit can set the predetermined image display area and the light / dark image display area based on the display content of the display image.
 この構成によれば、表示画像の表示内容に基づいて所定画像表示エリアと明暗画像表示エリアとを設定するため、観察者にとって見やすい表示が可能となる。 According to this configuration, since the predetermined image display area and the light / dark image display area are set based on the display content of the display image, a display that is easy for the observer to see is possible.
 また、前記画像表示制御部は、表示装置の表示面の表示領域に、前記所定画像表示エリア及び前記明暗画像表示エリア以外の第3エリアを設定することも可能である。 Further, the image display control unit can set a third area other than the predetermined image display area and the bright and dark image display area in the display area of the display surface of the display device.
 この構成によれば、この第3エリアを種々の形態にて利用することによりバラエティに富んだ表示態様が可能となる。 According to this configuration, a variety of display modes are possible by using the third area in various forms.
 また、前記第3エリアでは、画像を表示しないことも可能である。この構成によれば、表示領域における第3エリアの割合だけ省電力化が可能となる。 Also, it is possible not to display an image in the third area. According to this configuration, it is possible to save power by the ratio of the third area in the display area.
 また、前記画像表示パネルは、液晶層を透明基板間に挟持して構成された液晶表示パネルであり、前記液晶表示パネルの背面側に照明光を照射するバックライトと、前記バックライトの点灯及び消灯状態を制御するバックライト制御部と、を備えていることが可能である。この構成によれば、低消費電力かつ薄型に表示装置を構成することができる。 Further, the image display panel is a liquid crystal display panel configured by sandwiching a liquid crystal layer between transparent substrates, a backlight for irradiating illumination light to the back side of the liquid crystal display panel, lighting of the backlight, and And a backlight control unit that controls a light-off state. According to this configuration, the display device can be configured with low power consumption and a thin shape.
 また、前記画像表示制御部は、前記明暗画像表示エリアに対応する前記液晶表示パネルの液晶層を光非透過状態にすることが好ましい。この構成によれば、明暗画像表示エリアに対応する液晶表示パネルの液晶層を光非透過状態にするので、液晶表示パネルの背面側からの光が液晶表示パネルを通過せず、そのため光散乱性液晶表示パネル上の所定箇所に形成される暗色表示をクリアに表示できる。 Further, it is preferable that the image display control unit sets a liquid crystal layer of the liquid crystal display panel corresponding to the light and dark image display area to a light non-transmissive state. According to this configuration, since the liquid crystal layer of the liquid crystal display panel corresponding to the light and dark image display area is in a light non-transmissive state, the light from the back side of the liquid crystal display panel does not pass through the liquid crystal display panel, and thus the light scattering property A dark color display formed at a predetermined position on the liquid crystal display panel can be clearly displayed.
 また、前記バックライト制御部は、前記所定画像表示領域に対応するバックライトを点灯させ、一方、前記明暗画像表示領域に対応するバックライトは消灯させるか、又は、低消費電力状態で点灯させることも可能である。ここでバックライトを低消費電力状態で点灯させるとは、バックライトの照射部を薄暗く点灯させて消費電力を低く抑えることをいう。この構成によれば、所定画像表示領域に対応する箇所ではバックライトの照明により画像を明るく表示することができ、一方、明暗画像表示領域に対応する箇所では、バックライトを消灯又は低消費電力状態で点灯させるので、消費電力の省力化を達成することができる。 Further, the backlight control unit turns on the backlight corresponding to the predetermined image display area, while turning off the backlight corresponding to the light and dark image display area, or turns on the backlight in a low power consumption state. Is also possible. Here, to turn on the backlight in a low power consumption state means to turn on an illumination part of the backlight dimly to keep power consumption low. According to this configuration, an image can be brightly displayed by backlight illumination at a location corresponding to the predetermined image display area, while the backlight is turned off or in a low power consumption state at a location corresponding to the light / dark image display area. Since it is turned on, power saving can be achieved.
 また、前記バックライトは、複数の発光部を有し、前記バックライト制御部は、前記所定画像表示領域に対応するバックライトを点灯させ、一方、前記明暗画像表示領域に対応するバックライトの該発光部の一部を点灯させ、前記明暗画像表示領域に対応するバックライトの該発光部の他の部分を消灯させることも可能である。この構成においては、明暗画像表示のコントラストを向上しつつ、明暗画像表示領域に対応する箇所では、バックライトの一部しか点灯していないので、消費電力の省力化を達成することができる。 The backlight includes a plurality of light emitting units, and the backlight control unit turns on the backlight corresponding to the predetermined image display area, while the backlight corresponding to the light and dark image display area It is also possible to turn on a part of the light emitting part and turn off the other part of the light emitting part of the backlight corresponding to the bright and dark image display area. In this configuration, the contrast of bright / dark image display is improved, and only a part of the backlight is lit at a location corresponding to the bright / dark image display region, so that power saving can be achieved.
 また、前記画像表示パネルは、液晶層を透明基板間に挟持して構成された液晶表示パネルであり、前記液晶表示パネルの背面側に照明光を照射するバックライトと、前記バックライトの点灯及び消灯状態を制御するバックライト制御部と、前記バックライトを消灯させる消灯期間と、該バックライトを点灯させる点灯期間とを交互に切り替える間欠駆動制御部と、を備え、前記画像表示制御部は、前記間欠駆動制御部により前記バックライトが消灯期間のときに前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に基づき前記所定画像表示エリアと前記明暗画像表示エリアとを設定することも可能である。 Further, the image display panel is a liquid crystal display panel configured by sandwiching a liquid crystal layer between transparent substrates, a backlight for irradiating illumination light to the back side of the liquid crystal display panel, lighting of the backlight, and A backlight control unit that controls a light-off state, a light-out period in which the backlight is turned off, and an intermittent drive control unit that alternately switches between a lighting period in which the backlight is turned on, and the image display control unit includes: It is also possible to set the predetermined image display area and the light / dark image display area based on light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor when the backlight is turned off by the intermittent drive control unit.
 この構成によれば、照明光が含まれていない受光情報に基づいて、表示領域を照射する外部光を正確に反映して明暗画像表示エリア及び所定画像表示エリアを設定することができる。 According to this configuration, it is possible to set the light / dark image display area and the predetermined image display area by accurately reflecting the external light that irradiates the display area based on the light reception information that does not include the illumination light.
 また、前記受光センサは、前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルの内部に配置されていることも可能である。この構成によれば、表示領域に照射される外部光を正確に検出しやすくすることが可能である。 The light receiving sensor may be disposed inside the light scattering liquid crystal display panel. According to this configuration, it is possible to easily detect the external light applied to the display area accurately.
 また、前記受光センサは、前記液晶表示パネルの内部に配置されていることも可能である。この構成によっても、表示領域に照射される外部光を検出することが可能である。 In addition, the light receiving sensor may be disposed inside the liquid crystal display panel. Also with this configuration, it is possible to detect the external light irradiated on the display area.
 また、前記受光センサは、前記バックライトに配置されていることも可能である。この構成によれば、光散乱性液晶表示パネルの表示画素に形成された開口部を覆わずに、受光センサを表示領域に配置できるので、表示画素の開口率低下を防止できる。 Further, the light receiving sensor may be disposed in the backlight. According to this configuration, since the light receiving sensor can be arranged in the display area without covering the opening formed in the display pixel of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel, a decrease in the aperture ratio of the display pixel can be prevented.
 また、前記受光センサは、前記液晶表示パネルと前記バックライトとの間に配置されていることも可能である。この構成によれば、受光センサが光散乱性液晶表示パネルや液晶表示パネルやバックライトに直接設けられないため、光散乱性液晶表示パネルや液晶表示パネルやバックライトの構造を変えずに、受光センサを設けることができる。 In addition, the light receiving sensor may be disposed between the liquid crystal display panel and the backlight. According to this configuration, since the light receiving sensor is not provided directly on the light scattering liquid crystal display panel, the liquid crystal display panel, or the backlight, the light receiving sensor can be used without changing the structure of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel, the liquid crystal display panel, or the backlight. A sensor can be provided.
 また、前記画像表示パネルの正面側の透明基板と、前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルの背面側の透明基板とが共通して一つの透明基板であることが好ましい。この構成によれば、複数の透明基板が重なることによる光透過率の低下を防止でき、しかも表示装置の厚さを薄く構成することができる。 Further, it is preferable that the transparent substrate on the front side of the image display panel and the transparent substrate on the back side of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel are commonly used as one transparent substrate. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in light transmittance due to the overlapping of the plurality of transparent substrates, and it is possible to reduce the thickness of the display device.
 また、前記光散乱性液晶層は、メモリ液晶層であることが好ましい。ここで、メモリ液晶層とは、複数の光学的な状態を有し、電界を形成しなくても特定の状態を保持し続けること(メモリ特性)を有する液晶である。 The light-scattering liquid crystal layer is preferably a memory liquid crystal layer. Here, the memory liquid crystal layer is a liquid crystal having a plurality of optical states and maintaining a specific state (memory characteristics) without forming an electric field.
 この構成によれば、電界印加を停止した場合でもメモリ液晶層の液晶分子が配向状態を維持するメモリ特性により、光散乱性液晶表示パネル上に明暗画像の表示が維持されるので、消費電力の抑制化を促進できる。 According to this configuration, even when the application of an electric field is stopped, the display of bright and dark images on the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel is maintained due to the memory characteristic that the liquid crystal molecules in the memory liquid crystal layer maintain the alignment state. Suppression can be promoted.
 また、インターネット又は放送局のデジタル放送波を介して配信されるデジタルサイネージのコンテンツの映像データ及び音声データの少なくとも何れか一つを含むデータを受信し、受信したデジタルサイネージのコンテンツを前記光散乱性液晶表示パネル及び前記画像表示パネルの少なくとも何れか一方にて表示することが好ましい。 In addition, data including at least one of video data and audio data of digital signage content distributed via the digital broadcast wave of the Internet or a broadcasting station is received, and the received digital signage content is converted into the light scattering property. It is preferable to display on at least one of a liquid crystal display panel and the image display panel.
 この構成によれば、例えば、複数画像によって構成される広告を店舗等に来客した観察者(顧客)に好適に閲覧させることができ、また例えば、屋外に設置されて外部光の影響を受けやすいインフォメーションディスプレイに好適に用いることができる。 According to this configuration, for example, an advertisement composed of a plurality of images can be suitably viewed by an observer (customer) who has visited a store or the like, and is installed outdoors, for example, and easily affected by external light. It can be suitably used for an information display.
 また、前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルは、光散乱性液晶層を透明基板間に挟持して構成された個別の光散乱性液晶表示パネルが複数集合し、全体として一つの表示パネルを形成しており、前記画像表示パネルも、画像を形成する個別の画像表示パネルが複数集合し、全体として一つの表示パネルを形成していることも可能である。 The light-scattering liquid crystal display panel is composed of a plurality of individual light-scattering liquid crystal display panels configured by sandwiching a light-scattering liquid crystal layer between transparent substrates to form one display panel as a whole. In addition, the image display panel may be a collection of a plurality of individual image display panels that form an image to form a single display panel as a whole.
 この構成によれば、例えば屋外等に設置される看板や広告、標識等の情報伝達媒体として利用されるインフォメーションディスプレイ、ビルボードディスプレイ等のような大型の表示装置が構成できる。 According to this configuration, a large display device such as an information display or billboard display used as an information transmission medium such as a signboard, an advertisement, or a sign installed outdoors can be configured.
 また、前記画像表示制御部は、前記個別の光散乱性液晶表示パネル及び前記個別の画像表示パネルを各々独立して制御することが好ましい。この構成によれば、光散乱性液晶表示パネル及び画像表示パネルから構成される個々の表示ユニット区切りにて、明暗画像表示エリア及び所定画像表示エリアを設定することができるため、表示ユニット単位で表示又は非表示が可能となり、更なる省電力化が可能となる。 In addition, it is preferable that the image display control unit controls the individual light scattering liquid crystal display panel and the individual image display panel independently of each other. According to this configuration, since the light / dark image display area and the predetermined image display area can be set at the individual display unit partition composed of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel and the image display panel, display is performed in units of display units. Alternatively, non-display is possible and further power saving is possible.
 また、本発明の第2の観点に係る表示パネルは、透明基板間に光散乱性液晶層が挟持されてなる光散乱性液晶表示パネルと、前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルの背面側に配置され、画像を形成する画像表示パネルと、を備え、表示面の表示領域に、前記光散乱性液晶層を光透過状態にする暗色表示、及び、該暗色表示と異なる箇所にて光散乱性液晶層を光散乱状態にする明色表示を組み合わせることにより、明暗画像を表示する明暗画像表示エリアと、前記光散乱性液晶層を光透過状態とすることにより、前記画像表示パネルにて形成される所定画像を前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルを介して表示する所定画像表示エリアと、を有するように設定されることを特徴とする。 A display panel according to a second aspect of the present invention is disposed on a light scattering liquid crystal display panel in which a light scattering liquid crystal layer is sandwiched between transparent substrates, and on the back side of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel. An image display panel for forming an image, and a dark color display in which the light scattering liquid crystal layer is in a light transmitting state in a display area of a display surface, and a light scattering liquid crystal layer at a location different from the dark color display By combining light-colored display in a light-scattering state, a light-dark image display area for displaying a light-dark image, and a light-transmitting liquid crystal layer in a light-transmitting state, a predetermined formed on the image display panel And a predetermined image display area for displaying an image via the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel.
 また、本発明の第3の観点に係る表示モジュールは、透明基板間に光散乱性液晶層が挟持されてなる光散乱性液晶表示パネルと、前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルの背面側に配置され、画像を形成する画像表示パネルと、表示面の表示領域に照射された外部光を受光する複数の受光センサと、を備えた表示モジュールであって、前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に対して基準値が予め定められており、前記基準値を上回る受光情報が前記受光センサによって得られたときに、当該受光情報に基づいて、前記光散乱性液晶層を光透過状態にする暗色表示、及び、該暗色表示と異なる箇所にて光散乱性液晶層を光散乱状態にする明色表示を組み合わせることにより、明暗画像を表示する明暗画像表示エリアと、前記光散乱性液晶層を光透過状態とすることにより、前記画像表示パネルにて形成される所定画像を前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルを介して表示する所定画像表示エリアと、を表示面の表示領域に有するように設定されることを特徴とする。 A display module according to a third aspect of the present invention is disposed on a light scattering liquid crystal display panel in which a light scattering liquid crystal layer is sandwiched between transparent substrates, and on the back side of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel. A display module comprising an image display panel for forming an image and a plurality of light receiving sensors for receiving external light irradiated on a display area of a display surface, wherein the light receiving information obtained by the light receiving sensor A reference value is determined in advance, and when light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained by the light reception sensor, based on the light reception information, dark display that makes the light-scattering liquid crystal layer in a light transmission state, In addition, by combining a light color display in which the light scattering liquid crystal layer is in a light scattering state at a different location from the dark color display, a light / dark image display area for displaying a light / dark image and light transmission through the light scattering liquid crystal layer By setting the state, a predetermined image display area for displaying a predetermined image formed on the image display panel via the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel is set in the display area of the display surface. It is characterized by.
 また、本発明の第4の観点に係る画像表示システムは、透明基板間に光散乱性液晶層が挟持されてなる光散乱性液晶表示パネル、及び、前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルの背面側に配置されて画像を形成する画像表示パネルを有する表示装置と、表示面の表示領域に画像を表示させる画像信号を作成し、前記画像信号を前記表示装置に送る外部処理装置と、を備えた画像表示システムであって、表示面の表示領域に、前記光散乱性液晶層を光透過状態にする暗色表示、及び、該暗色表示と異なる箇所にて光散乱性液晶層を光散乱状態にする明色表示を組み合わせることにより、明暗画像を表示する明暗画像表示エリアと、前記光散乱性液晶層を光透過状態とすることにより、前記画像表示パネルにて形成される所定画像を前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルを介して表示する所定画像表示エリアと、を有するように設定する画像表示制御部を有していることを特徴とする。 An image display system according to a fourth aspect of the present invention includes a light-scattering liquid crystal display panel in which a light-scattering liquid crystal layer is sandwiched between transparent substrates, and a back side of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel. An image comprising: a display device having an image display panel that is arranged to form an image; and an external processing device that creates an image signal for displaying an image in a display area of a display surface and sends the image signal to the display device In the display system, in the display area of the display surface, a dark color display in which the light scattering liquid crystal layer is in a light transmission state, and a light in which the light scattering liquid crystal layer is in a light scattering state at a location different from the dark color display. By combining the color display, a light / dark image display area for displaying a light / dark image and the light scattering liquid crystal layer in a light transmission state, the predetermined image formed on the image display panel is transferred to the light scattering liquid crystal. display Characterized in that it comprises an image display control unit that sets to have a predetermined image display area for displaying through the panel, the.
 また、本発明の第5の観点に係る画像表示方法は、透明基板間に光散乱性液晶層が挟持されてなる光散乱性液晶表示パネルと、前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルの背面側に配置され、画像を形成する画像表示パネルと、を備えた表示装置に対して、表示面の表示領域に、前記光散乱性液晶層を光透過状態にする暗色表示、及び、該暗色表示と異なる箇所にて光散乱性液晶層を光散乱状態にする明色表示を組み合わせることにより、明暗画像を表示する明暗画像表示エリアと、前記光散乱性液晶層を光透過状態とすることにより、前記画像表示パネルにて形成される所定画像を前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルを介して表示する所定画像表示エリアと、を有するように画像を表示する。 An image display method according to a fifth aspect of the present invention includes a light-scattering liquid crystal display panel in which a light-scattering liquid crystal layer is sandwiched between transparent substrates, and a back side of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel. And a display device having an image display panel for forming an image, a dark color display for making the light-scattering liquid crystal layer in a light transmission state in a display area of a display surface, and a place different from the dark color display By combining the bright color display that brings the light-scattering liquid crystal layer into the light-scattering state, the light-dark image display area for displaying the light-dark image, and the light-scattering liquid crystal layer in the light-transmitting state, the image display An image is displayed so as to have a predetermined image display area for displaying a predetermined image formed on the panel via the light scattering liquid crystal display panel.
 本発明では、表示装置の表示面の表示領域に、明色表示及び暗色表示の組み合わせから成る明暗画像を表示する明暗画像表示エリアと、画像表示パネルにて形成される所定画像を表示する所定画像表示エリアとを有するように設定する。そして、明暗画像表示エリアでは、所定箇所にて光散乱性液晶層を光透過状態にして暗色表示を行い、他の箇所にて光散乱性液晶層を光散乱状態にして明色表示を行い、該明色表示及び暗色表示の組み合わせから成る明暗画像を表示する。所定画像表示エリアでは、光散乱性液晶表示パネルの光散乱性液晶層を光透過状態とすることにより、光散乱性液晶表示パネルを介して画像表示パネルにて形成される所定画像を表示する。 In the present invention, in the display area of the display surface of the display device, a light / dark image display area for displaying a light / dark image composed of a combination of light color display and dark color display, and a predetermined image for displaying a predetermined image formed on the image display panel And a display area. In the bright and dark image display area, the light scattering liquid crystal layer is light-transmitted in a predetermined position to perform dark color display, and the light scattering liquid crystal layer is light scattered in other positions to perform light color display. A bright and dark image composed of a combination of the bright color display and the dark color display is displayed. In the predetermined image display area, the light-scattering liquid crystal layer of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel is set in a light transmitting state, thereby displaying a predetermined image formed on the image display panel via the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel.
 本発明によれば、光散乱性液晶表示パネルの光散乱性液晶層を光散乱状態にして光散乱性液晶表示パネル上の所定の箇所に明色表示を行うと共に、光透過状態にして他の箇所に行う暗色表示を行うことにより、これら明色及び暗色表示の組み合わせから成る画像を明暗画像表示エリアに表示するので、省電力状態にて識別情報の表示が可能となる。また、所定画像表示エリアにて、画像表示パネルにて形成される所定画像を表示するので、宣伝情報の表示が可能となる。 According to the present invention, the light-scattering liquid crystal layer of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel is set in a light-scattering state to perform bright color display at a predetermined location on the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel, and in a light-transmitting state. By performing the dark color display performed at the location, an image composed of the combination of the bright color and the dark color display is displayed in the light / dark image display area, so that the identification information can be displayed in the power saving state. In addition, since the predetermined image formed on the image display panel is displayed in the predetermined image display area, the advertisement information can be displayed.
表示装置の全体の概略を説明する説明図である。It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the whole display apparatus. 表示装置の断面を概略的に説明する断面図である。It is sectional drawing which illustrates the cross section of a display apparatus roughly. バックライトを概略的に示す一部拡大平面図である。It is a partially expanded plan view which shows a backlight schematically. 画像表示パネルの正面側の透明基板と光散乱性液晶表示パネルの背面側の透明基板とが共通して一つの透明基板である表示装置の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the display apparatus whose transparent substrate of the front side of an image display panel and the transparent substrate of the back side of a light-scattering liquid crystal display panel are one transparent substrate. 光散乱性液晶表示パネルのアクティブマトリクス型の回路構成図である。It is an active matrix circuit configuration diagram of a light-scattering liquid crystal display panel. 基板上に多結晶シリコン膜を形成する工程の概略図である。It is the schematic of the process of forming a polycrystalline silicon film on a substrate. 薄膜トランジスタの活性層を形成する工程の概略図である。It is the schematic of the process of forming the active layer of a thin-film transistor. ゲート電極を形成する工程の概略図である。It is the schematic of the process of forming a gate electrode. 第1の層間絶縁膜を形成する工程の概略図である。It is the schematic of the process of forming a 1st interlayer insulation film. ソース/ドレイン電極を形成する工程の概略図である。It is the schematic of the process of forming a source / drain electrode. 画素電極を形成する工程の概略図である。It is the schematic of the process of forming a pixel electrode. インターネット経由のデジタルサイネージシステムのブロック図である。It is a block diagram of a digital signage system via the Internet. 表示領域に明暗画像表示エリアと所定画像表示エリアとを設定して表示する具体例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the specific example which sets and displays a light-and-dark image display area and a predetermined image display area in a display area. 表示装置の使用態様を概略的に説明する断面図である。It is sectional drawing which illustrates roughly the usage condition of a display apparatus. 表示装置の構造を概略的に説明するブロック図である。It is a block diagram which illustrates roughly the structure of a display apparatus. 受光センサの配置位置を説明する光散乱性液晶表示パネルの詳細な断面図である。It is detailed sectional drawing of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel explaining the arrangement position of a light reception sensor. 表示装置全体についてのカラーフィルター層の配置を説明する断面図である。It is sectional drawing explaining arrangement | positioning of the color filter layer about the whole display apparatus. 表示装置の配線構造及び制御部を模式的に示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows typically the wiring structure and control part of a display apparatus. 画素の構成を示す回路図である。It is a circuit diagram which shows the structure of a pixel. 画像表示制御部の構成の一具体例を説明するブロック図である。It is a block diagram explaining one specific example of a structure of an image display control part. 表示装置の制御方法の一具体例を説明するフローチャートである。It is a flowchart explaining one specific example of the control method of a display apparatus. 外部光としての太陽光が表示領域に直接に照射されている表示装置を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows the display apparatus with which sunlight as external light is directly irradiated to the display area. 外部光が表示領域に直接に照射されている場合における、明暗画像表示エリア及び所定画像表示エリアの表示態様の変形例を説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the modification of the display mode of the bright-and-dark image display area and the predetermined image display area in case external light is directly irradiated to the display area. 外部光が表示領域に直接に照射されている場合における、明暗画像表示エリア及び所定画像表示エリアの表示態様の変形例を説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the modification of the display mode of the bright-and-dark image display area and the predetermined image display area in case external light is directly irradiated to the display area. 外部光が表示領域に直接に照射されている場合における、明暗画像表示エリア及び所定画像表示エリアの表示態様の変形例を説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the modification of the display mode of the bright-and-dark image display area and the predetermined image display area in case external light is directly irradiated to the display area. 外部光が表示領域に直接に照射されている場合における、明暗画像表示エリア及び所定画像表示エリアの表示態様の変形例であり、第3エリアが表示されている図である。It is a figure which is the modification of the display mode of the bright-and-dark image display area and the predetermined image display area when external light is directly irradiated to the display area, and is a diagram in which a third area is displayed. 外部光が表示領域に直接に照射されている場合における、明暗画像表示エリア及び所定画像表示エリアの表示態様の変形例であり、第3エリアが表示されている図である。It is a figure which is the modification of the display mode of the bright-and-dark image display area and the predetermined image display area when external light is directly irradiated to the display area, and is a diagram in which a third area is displayed. 外部光が表示領域に直接に照射されている場合における、明暗画像表示エリア及び所定画像表示エリアの表示態様の変形例であり、所定画像表示エリア及び明暗画像表示エリアを上下に入れ替えて表示する図である。FIG. 5 is a modification of the display mode of the bright / dark image display area and the predetermined image display area when external light is directly applied to the display area, and is a diagram in which the predetermined image display area and the bright / dark image display area are switched up and down and displayed. It is. 強度が高い外部光が表示領域に直接に照射されている場合における、明暗画像表示エリア及び所定画像表示エリアの表示態様の変形例であり、暗画像表示エリア及び所定画像表示エリア720が共に比較的暗い領域に配置されている図である。This is a modification of the display mode of the bright and dark image display area and the predetermined image display area when external light having high intensity is directly irradiated on the display area. Both the dark image display area and the predetermined image display area 720 are relatively It is a figure arrange | positioned at a dark area | region. 受光センサの配置の変形例であり、表示領域の四辺のうち対向した二辺の中点を結ぶ線に沿った配置を模式的に示す表示装置のブロック図である。FIG. 10 is a block diagram of a display device that is a modification of the arrangement of the light receiving sensors and schematically shows the arrangement along the line connecting the midpoints of two opposite sides of the four sides of the display region. 受光センサの配置の変形例であり、表示領域の四辺のうち対向した二辺の中点を結ぶ線に沿った配置を模式的に示す表示装置のブロック図である。FIG. 10 is a block diagram of a display device that is a modification of the arrangement of the light receiving sensors and schematically shows the arrangement along the line connecting the midpoints of two opposite sides of the four sides of the display region. 受光センサの配置の変形例であり、表示領域の周縁部において、表示領域90の四辺のうち少なくとも対向した二辺に沿った受光センサの配置を模式的に示す表示装置のブロック図である。FIG. 10 is a block diagram of a display device that is a modification of the arrangement of the light receiving sensors and schematically shows the arrangement of the light receiving sensors along at least two opposite sides of the four sides of the display area 90 in the peripheral portion of the display area. 受光センサの配置の変形例であり、表示領域の周縁部において、表示領域90の四辺のうち少なくとも対向した二辺に沿った受光センサの配置を模式的に示す表示装置のブロック図である。FIG. 10 is a block diagram of a display device that is a modification of the arrangement of the light receiving sensors and schematically shows the arrangement of the light receiving sensors along at least two opposite sides of the four sides of the display area 90 in the peripheral portion of the display area. 受光センサの配置の変形例であり、表示領域の少なくとも一方の対角線に沿った受光センサの配置を模式的に示す表示装置のブロック図である。FIG. 10 is a block diagram of a display device that is a modification of the arrangement of the light receiving sensors and schematically shows the arrangement of the light receiving sensors along at least one diagonal line of the display region. 受光センサの配置の変形例であり、表示領域の周縁部における各辺の中央部での配置を模式的に示す表示装置のブロック図である。It is a modification of the arrangement of the light receiving sensor, and is a block diagram of a display device schematically showing the arrangement at the center of each side in the peripheral part of the display area. 受光センサの配置の変形例であり、表示領域の周縁部の四隅での配置を模式的に示す表示装置のブロック図である。FIG. 10 is a block diagram of a display device that is a modification of the arrangement of the light receiving sensors and schematically shows the arrangement at the four corners of the peripheral portion of the display region. 受光センサの配置の変形例であり、表示領域を複数のエリアに分割し、受光センサをその位置に対応させた配置を模式的に示す表示装置のブロック図である。FIG. 10 is a block diagram of a display device that is a modification of the arrangement of the light receiving sensors and schematically shows an arrangement in which the display area is divided into a plurality of areas and the light receiving sensors are associated with the positions. 液晶パネルの構造を拡大して示す断面図であり、受光センサがブラックマトリクスにより覆われるように配置されている状態を示す図である。It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the structure of a liquid crystal panel, and is a figure which shows the state arrange | positioned so that a light reception sensor may be covered with a black matrix. 液晶パネルの構造を拡大して示す断面図であり、受光センサがブラックマトリクスの中に配置されている状態を示す図である。It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the structure of a liquid crystal panel, and is a figure which shows the state by which the light reception sensor is arrange | positioned in the black matrix. バックライトを概略的に示す一部拡大平面図であり、受光センサがバックライトに配置されている状態を示す図である。FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged plan view schematically showing a backlight, and is a diagram showing a state in which a light receiving sensor is arranged in the backlight. 画像の優先情報を考慮して、表示領域に明暗画像と所定画像とを表示した表示装置の一具体例を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows one specific example of the display apparatus which displayed the brightness image and the predetermined image on the display area in consideration of the priority information of an image. 異なる時間帯において画像の優先情報が変更された場合において、明暗画像と所定画像とを表示した表示装置の一具体例を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows the specific example of the display apparatus which displayed the bright-and-dark image and the predetermined image, when the priority information of an image was changed in a different time slot | zone. 表示画像の表示内容を考慮して、表示領域に明暗画像と所定画像とを表示した表示装置の一具体例を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows the specific example of the display apparatus which displayed the brightness image and the predetermined image on the display area in consideration of the display content of a display image. 明暗画像表示エリアにおいて、暗色表示が形成される箇所に対応する照射部を消灯させ、明色表示が形成される箇所に対応する照射部は点灯させる表示形態を説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the display form which turns off the irradiation part corresponding to the location where a dark color display is formed in a light-dark image display area, and turns on the irradiation part corresponding to the location where a bright color display is formed. 間欠駆動制御部を備えている表示装置の配線構造及び制御部を模式的に示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows typically the wiring structure and control part of a display apparatus provided with the intermittent drive control part. バックライトの間欠駆動を示すタイミングチャートである。It is a timing chart which shows the intermittent drive of a backlight. メモリ液晶層中に色素が混入されることによりカラー表示を行う実施形態を説明する図であり、混入させた色素の出射光を吸収させる場合を示す図である。It is a figure explaining embodiment which performs a color display by mixing a pigment | dye in a memory liquid crystal layer, and is a figure which shows the case where the emitted light of the mixed pigment | dye is absorbed. メモリ液晶層中に色素が混入されることによりカラー表示を行う実施形態を説明する図であり、混入させた色素の出射光を外部に照射させる場合を示す図である。It is a figure explaining embodiment which performs a color display by mixing a pigment | dye in a memory liquid crystal layer, and is a figure which shows the case where the emitted light of the mixed pigment | dye is irradiated outside. 所定画像表示エリアの画像の視角依存性を可変にする表示態様を説明する図であり、視覚依存性の少ない表示を行う場合を示す図である。It is a figure explaining the display mode which makes the viewing angle dependence of the image of a predetermined image display area variable, and is a figure which shows the case where the display with little visual dependence is performed. 所定画像表示エリアの画像の視角依存性を可変にする表示態様を説明する図であり、視覚依存性の多い表示を行う場合を示す図である。It is a figure explaining the display mode which makes the viewing angle dependence of the image of a predetermined image display area variable, and is a figure which shows the case where a display with much visual dependence is performed. 反射鏡板を形成した表示装置の説明図である。It is explanatory drawing of the display apparatus which formed the reflecting mirror board. 単一の光散乱性液晶表示パネルと単一の液晶表示パネルとを備えて表示ユニットを構成し、その表示ユニットをマトリクス状に配置して表示領域を構成した表示装置の表示画面を説明する図である。The figure explaining the display screen of the display apparatus which comprised the display unit which comprised the single light-scattering liquid crystal display panel and the single liquid crystal display panel, and comprised the display unit in the matrix form, and comprised the display area. It is. 表示ユニットをマトリクス状に配置して表示領域を構成した表示装置において、外部光が表示領域に照射された場合において、明暗画像表示エリアと所定画像表示エリアとを設定する状態を説明する図である。FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a state in which a bright / dark image display area and a predetermined image display area are set when external light is irradiated on the display area in a display device in which display units are arranged in a matrix to form a display area. . 表示モジュールを模式的に示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows a display module typically.
 《実施形態1》
 以下、添付の図面を参照して本発明の実施形態について具体的に説明するが、当該実施形態は本発明の原理の理解を容易にするためのものであり、本発明の範囲は、下記の実施形態に限られるものではなく、当業者が以下の実施形態の構成を適宜置換した他の実施形態も、本発明の範囲に含まれる。
Embodiment 1
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the accompanying drawings. However, the embodiments are for facilitating understanding of the principle of the present invention, and the scope of the present invention is as follows. The present invention is not limited to the embodiments, and other embodiments in which those skilled in the art appropriately replace the configurations of the following embodiments are also included in the scope of the present invention.
 図1は、本実施形態に係る表示装置900の全体の説明図である。本実施形態では画像表示パネルとして例えば液晶表示パネル100を用いる。図1に示されるように、表示装置900は、通常使用時に画像を表示する液晶表示パネル100と、液晶表示パネル100の背面側に照明光を照射するバックライト300と、光散乱性液晶層が基板間に挟持された光散乱性液晶表示パネル200と、画像表示制御部500と、バックライト300の点灯及び消灯状態を制御するバックライト制御部501と、を有して構成される。液晶表示パネル100は、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の背面側(即ちバックライト側)に対向して配置される。 FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of the entire display device 900 according to the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, for example, the liquid crystal display panel 100 is used as the image display panel. As shown in FIG. 1, a display device 900 includes a liquid crystal display panel 100 that displays an image during normal use, a backlight 300 that irradiates illumination light to the back side of the liquid crystal display panel 100, and a light-scattering liquid crystal layer. A light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 sandwiched between substrates, an image display control unit 500, and a backlight control unit 501 for controlling the lighting and extinguishing states of the backlight 300 are configured. The liquid crystal display panel 100 is disposed to face the back side (that is, the backlight side) of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200.
 図2は、本実施形態に係る表示装置900の断面図である。図2に示されるように、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200は、例えばアクティブマトリクス型の液晶表示パネルであり、背面側に配置された例えばアレイ基板である第2透明基板12と、第2透明基板12と対向して正面側に配置された例えば対向基板である第1透明基板11と、第1透明基板11と第2透明基板12との間に挟持された光散乱性液晶層としてのメモリ液晶層36と、を有する。 FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of the display device 900 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 2, the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 is, for example, an active matrix type liquid crystal display panel, and includes, for example, a second transparent substrate 12 that is an array substrate disposed on the back side, and a second transparent substrate. Memory liquid crystal as a light scattering liquid crystal layer sandwiched between a first transparent substrate 11 and a second transparent substrate 12, for example, a first transparent substrate 11 that is disposed on the front side facing the substrate 12. Layer 36.
 メモリ液晶層36の漏洩を防止するために第1透明基板11と第2透明基板12との周囲はシール材29により封止されている。メモリ液晶層36のメモリ液晶としては、特に限定されるものではないが、例えばメモリ特性に優れる強誘電性液晶やコレステリック液晶等を使用することが可能である。 In order to prevent leakage of the memory liquid crystal layer 36, the periphery of the first transparent substrate 11 and the second transparent substrate 12 is sealed with a sealing material 29. The memory liquid crystal of the memory liquid crystal layer 36 is not particularly limited. For example, a ferroelectric liquid crystal or a cholesteric liquid crystal having excellent memory characteristics can be used.
 第1透明基板11の内側即ち背面側表面には、例えば対向電極25が形成され、第2透明基板12の内側即ち正面側表面には、例えば画素電極23が形成される。対向電極25には、図示していない外部駆動回路から所定の対向電位が与えられている。 For example, a counter electrode 25 is formed on the inner surface of the first transparent substrate 11, that is, the back surface, and a pixel electrode 23 is formed on the inner surface of the second transparent substrate 12, that is, the front surface. The counter electrode 25 is given a predetermined counter potential from an external drive circuit (not shown).
 光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の背面側には液晶表示パネル100が配置されている。液晶表示パネル100も、例えばアクティブマトリクス型の液晶表示パネルであり、背面側に配置された例えばアレイ基板である第4透明基板14と、第4透明基板14と対向して正面側に配置された例えば対向基板である第3透明基板13と、第3透明基板13と第4透明基板14との間に挟持された液晶層26と、を有する。液晶表示パネル100の第3透明基板13と、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の第2透明基板12とは対向して配置されている。 A liquid crystal display panel 100 is disposed on the back side of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200. The liquid crystal display panel 100 is also an active matrix type liquid crystal display panel, for example, and is disposed on the front side facing the fourth transparent substrate 14 and the fourth transparent substrate 14 that is, for example, an array substrate disposed on the back side. For example, it has the 3rd transparent substrate 13 which is a counter substrate, and the liquid crystal layer 26 pinched | interposed between the 3rd transparent substrate 13 and the 4th transparent substrate 14. FIG. The third transparent substrate 13 of the liquid crystal display panel 100 and the second transparent substrate 12 of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 are disposed to face each other.
 液晶層26の漏洩を防止するために第3透明基板13と第4透明基板14との周囲はシール材39により封止されている。液晶層26としては、特に限定されるものではないが、例えば、TN(twisted nematic)形、GH(guest-host)形、STN(super-twistednematic)形、SBE(super-twistedbirefringence effect)形、ECB(electrically controlled birefringence)形等を使用することができる。 In order to prevent leakage of the liquid crystal layer 26, the periphery of the third transparent substrate 13 and the fourth transparent substrate 14 is sealed with a sealing material 39. Although it does not specifically limit as the liquid crystal layer 26, For example, TN (twistedmaticnematic) type, GH (guest-host) type, STN (super-twistednematic) type, SBE (super-twistedbirefringence effect) type, ECB (Electrically controlled birefringence) shape etc. can be used.
 第3透明基板13の内側即ち背面側表面には、例えば対向電極35が形成され、第4透明基板14の内側即ち正面側表面には、例えば画素電極33が形成される。対向電極35には、図示していない外部駆動回路から所定の対向電位が与えられている。第3透明基板13及び第4透明基板14の外側には、直交ニコルで配置される通常吸収型の上偏光板32及び下偏光板31が形成される。 For example, a counter electrode 35 is formed on the inner surface of the third transparent substrate 13, that is, the back surface, and a pixel electrode 33 is formed on the inner surface of the fourth transparent substrate 14, that is, the front surface. A predetermined counter potential is applied to the counter electrode 35 from an external drive circuit (not shown). On the outside of the third transparent substrate 13 and the fourth transparent substrate 14, a normal absorption type upper polarizing plate 32 and a lower polarizing plate 31 arranged in crossed Nicols are formed.
 第1透明基板1、第2透明基板12、第3透明電極、及び第4透明電極としては、特に限定されるものではないが、例えばガラス板や石英板等の光透過性を有する基板を使用することができる。画素電極23,33及び対向電極25,35は例えばITO(インジウム錫酸化物)等の光透過性導電材料にて形成される。 Although it does not specifically limit as the 1st transparent substrate 1, the 2nd transparent substrate 12, the 3rd transparent electrode, and the 4th transparent electrode, For example, the board | substrate which has light transmittances, such as a glass plate and a quartz plate, is used. can do. The pixel electrodes 23 and 33 and the counter electrodes 25 and 35 are formed of a light transmissive conductive material such as ITO (indium tin oxide).
 液晶表示パネル100と光散乱性液晶表示パネル200とは、例えばスペーサ等を介して所定間隔を介在して配置されているが、これに限定されず液晶表示パネル100と光散乱性液晶表示パネル200とを密接して配置、即ち、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の第2透明基板12と液晶表示パネル100の第3透明基板13とを密接させて配置することも可能である。 The liquid crystal display panel 100 and the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 are arranged with a predetermined interval through, for example, a spacer, but are not limited thereto, and the liquid crystal display panel 100 and the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 are arranged. The second transparent substrate 12 of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 and the third transparent substrate 13 of the liquid crystal display panel 100 can be disposed in close contact with each other.
 液晶表示パネル100の背面側にはバックライト300が配置されている。図3は、バックライト300を概略的に示す一部拡大平面図である。バックライト300は、図3に示すように、略矩形状の筐体であるバックライトシャーシ301を備えている。バックライトシャーシ301の正面側には開口部が形成されている。バックライト300は、図3に示すように、液晶表示パネル100の背面に光を照射する照射部302を複数備えている。照射部302は、複数の点光源302aにより構成されており、複数の点光源302aからなる照射部302を各々制御することによって、バックライト300から照射される照明光の輝度及び色度を部分的に調整することができる。また、この実施形態では、図3に示すように、照射部302が格子状に配置されている。なお、照射部302の配置は、格子状に限定されない。例えば、照射部302の位置が列毎にずれるような配置(千鳥格子状又はジグザグ状の配置)でもよい。 A backlight 300 is disposed on the back side of the liquid crystal display panel 100. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged plan view schematically showing the backlight 300. As illustrated in FIG. 3, the backlight 300 includes a backlight chassis 301 that is a substantially rectangular casing. An opening is formed on the front side of the backlight chassis 301. As shown in FIG. 3, the backlight 300 includes a plurality of irradiation units 302 that irradiate light to the back surface of the liquid crystal display panel 100. The irradiating unit 302 includes a plurality of point light sources 302a. By controlling each of the irradiating units 302 including the plurality of point light sources 302a, the luminance and chromaticity of the illumination light irradiated from the backlight 300 are partially set. Can be adjusted. Moreover, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the irradiation part 302 is arrange | positioned at the grid | lattice form. Note that the arrangement of the irradiation unit 302 is not limited to a lattice shape. For example, an arrangement (a staggered or zigzag arrangement) in which the position of the irradiation unit 302 is shifted for each column may be used.
 点光源302aは、例えば発光ダイオード(LED:Light Emitting Diode)によって構成されている。即ち、複数のLED302aによって1つの照射部302が形成されている。ところで、バックライト300から生じる照明光は、白色光が望ましい場合がある。この実施形態では、R(赤),G(緑),B(青)3色のLED302aによって照射部302が形成されており、RGB3色のLED302aから生じる光を混色することによって照明光を白色光にしている。なお、照明光を白色光にする方法は、上述の方法に限定されない。例えば、照射部302は、白色光を発する白色LEDから形成されていてもよい。 The point light source 302a is composed of, for example, a light emitting diode (LED). That is, one irradiation unit 302 is formed by a plurality of LEDs 302a. Incidentally, the illumination light generated from the backlight 300 may be preferably white light. In this embodiment, the irradiation unit 302 is formed by LEDs 302a of three colors of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), and the illumination light is converted into white light by mixing light generated from the LEDs 302a of RGB three colors. I have to. In addition, the method of making illumination light white light is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, the irradiation unit 302 may be formed from a white LED that emits white light.
 照明光の明るさは、照射部302の各LED302aに投入される電力を制御することによって調整される。即ち、照射部302に投入される電力が高くなると照明光が明るく(輝度が高く)なり、投入される電力が低くなると照明光が暗く(輝度が低く)なる。照射部302に投入する電力は、例えば、パルス幅変調方式及びPWM方式(pulse width modulation)等によって制御されているとよい。 The brightness of the illumination light is adjusted by controlling the power input to each LED 302a of the irradiation unit 302. That is, the illumination light becomes bright (the luminance is high) when the power input to the irradiation unit 302 is high, and the illumination light is dark (the luminance is low) when the power is low. The power input to the irradiation unit 302 may be controlled by, for example, a pulse width modulation method, a PWM method (pulse width modulation), or the like.
 なお、表示装置900の構成としては、上述したように、4つの透明基板にて構成されるものに限定されず、図4に示すように、画像表示パネル100の第3透明基板と光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の第2透明基板とが共通して一つの共通透明基板15として構成されることも可能である。このような3つの透明基板にて表示装置900を構成する場合、共通透明基板15の正面側表面には画素電極23が形成されており、共通透明基板15の背面側表面には対向電極35が形成される。この構成によれば、複数の透明基板が重なることによる光透過率の低下を防止でき、しかも表示装置の厚さを薄く構成することができるので、近年の液晶表示パネルの薄型化の要請に合致することができる。 Note that the configuration of the display device 900 is not limited to the configuration including the four transparent substrates as described above, and the third transparent substrate and the light scattering property of the image display panel 100 as illustrated in FIG. The second transparent substrate of the liquid crystal display panel 200 may be configured as one common transparent substrate 15 in common. When the display device 900 is configured with such three transparent substrates, the pixel electrode 23 is formed on the front surface of the common transparent substrate 15, and the counter electrode 35 is formed on the rear surface of the common transparent substrate 15. It is formed. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in light transmittance due to the overlapping of a plurality of transparent substrates, and it is possible to reduce the thickness of the display device, which meets the recent demand for thinner liquid crystal display panels. can do.
 画像表示制御部500は、明暗画像を表示する明暗画像表示エリアと、所定画像を表示する所定画像表示エリアとを設定して表示領域に表示する。 The image display control unit 500 sets a light / dark image display area for displaying a light / dark image and a predetermined image display area for displaying a predetermined image, and displays them in the display area.
 次に、図5は、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200のアクティブマトリクス型の回路構成図である。光散乱性液晶表示パネル200は、複数の表示画素80が形成された表示領域90と、ゲートドライバ110と、ソースドライバ120とを有して構成される。表示領域90は、第2透明基板12上に複数本の走査線22及びこれと交差する複数本の信号線21が図示していない絶縁膜を介してマトリクス形状に配置されており、信号線21及び走査線22の各交差部には表示画素80が配置されている。即ち、表示領域90には、複数の表示画素80がマトリクス状に配置されている。この実施形態では、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200は、全体として概ね矩形の形状を有しており、表示領域90の形状も概ね矩形である。ここで、()内の添え字は、各走査信号線22同士を区別すると共に、各データ信号線21同士を区別するために付したものである。表示画素80は、画素電極23、薄膜トランジスタ(thin filmtransistor:TFT)24、対向電極25、メモリ液晶層
36を有して構成されている。TFT24のソースは信号線21に、ゲートは走査線22に、ドレインは画素電極23に各々接続されている。
Next, FIG. 5 is an active matrix circuit configuration diagram of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200. The light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 includes a display region 90 in which a plurality of display pixels 80 are formed, a gate driver 110, and a source driver 120. In the display area 90, a plurality of scanning lines 22 and a plurality of signal lines 21 intersecting with the scanning lines 22 are arranged on the second transparent substrate 12 in a matrix shape via an insulating film (not shown). In addition, display pixels 80 are arranged at each intersection of the scanning lines 22. That is, in the display area 90, a plurality of display pixels 80 are arranged in a matrix. In this embodiment, the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 has a generally rectangular shape as a whole, and the shape of the display region 90 is also generally rectangular. Here, the subscripts in parentheses are added to distinguish the scanning signal lines 22 from each other and to distinguish the data signal lines 21 from each other. The display pixel 80 includes a pixel electrode 23, a thin film transistor (TFT) 24, a counter electrode 25, and a memory liquid crystal layer 36. The source of the TFT 24 is connected to the signal line 21, the gate is connected to the scanning line 22, and the drain is connected to the pixel electrode 23.
 ゲートドライバ110は、図示していないバッファ回路及びシフトレジスタ等で構成されており、図示していない外部駆動回路から供給されるコントロール信号に基づいて、順に走査線22に走査信号を出力していく。例えば明暗画像表示エリアに時計表示のような動画を表示する際には、ゲートドライバ110では、制御信号線30をオフレベルとし、通常のアクティブマトリクス型液晶表示パネルと同様に順に走査線22に走査信号を出力していく。一方、例えば明暗画像表示エリアに晴れ、雨、雪等のような各種の天気マークのような静止画を表示する際には、走査線22をオフレベルとし、制御信号線30をオンレベルとする。 The gate driver 110 includes a buffer circuit and a shift register (not shown), and sequentially outputs scanning signals to the scanning lines 22 based on control signals supplied from an external driving circuit (not shown). . For example, when displaying a moving image such as a clock display in the bright and dark image display area, the gate driver 110 sets the control signal line 30 to the off level and sequentially scans the scanning lines 22 as in the case of a normal active matrix liquid crystal display panel. Output the signal. On the other hand, when displaying still images such as various weather marks such as sunny, rainy, snow, etc., for example, in the bright and dark image display area, the scanning line 22 is turned off and the control signal line 30 is turned on. .
 ソースドライバ120は、アナログスイッチやシフトレジスタ等で構成されており、図示していない外部駆動回路からコントロール信号及びビデオバスを通じて映像信号が供給されている。ソースドライバ120では、シフトレジスタからアナログスイッチの開閉信号を供給することにより、ビデオバスから供給される映像信号を所定のタイミングで信号線21にサンプリングする。 The source driver 120 includes an analog switch, a shift register, and the like, and a video signal is supplied from an external drive circuit (not shown) through a control signal and a video bus. The source driver 120 samples the video signal supplied from the video bus on the signal line 21 at a predetermined timing by supplying an analog switch open / close signal from the shift register.
 液晶表示パネル100のアクティブマトリクス型回路構成についても上述した光散乱性液晶表示パネル200のアクティブマトリクス型の回路構成と同様に形成される。即ち、複数の表示画素が形成された表示領域と、ゲートドライバと、ソースドライバとを有して構成され、ゲートドライバ及びソースドライバは、第4透明基板14上において、信号線、走査線及び画素電極33と一体に形成される。第4透明基板14上には複数本の走査線及びこれと交差する複数本の信号線が絶縁膜を介してマトリクス形状に配置されており、信号線及び走査線の各交差部には表示画素が配置され、その表示画素を有して表示領域が構成される。表示画素は、画素電極33、TFT、対向電極35、液晶層26を有して構成されている。TFTのソースは信号線に、ゲートは走査線に、ドレインは画素電極に各々接続される。 The active matrix circuit configuration of the liquid crystal display panel 100 is formed in the same manner as the active matrix circuit configuration of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 described above. In other words, the display area in which a plurality of display pixels are formed, a gate driver, and a source driver are included, and the gate driver and the source driver are arranged on the fourth transparent substrate 14 with signal lines, scanning lines, and pixels. It is formed integrally with the electrode 33. On the fourth transparent substrate 14, a plurality of scanning lines and a plurality of signal lines intersecting with the scanning lines are arranged in a matrix shape through an insulating film, and display pixels are arranged at the intersections of the signal lines and the scanning lines. Is arranged, and the display area is configured by including the display pixels. The display pixel includes a pixel electrode 33, a TFT, a counter electrode 35, and a liquid crystal layer 26. The TFT has a source connected to the signal line, a gate connected to the scanning line, and a drain connected to the pixel electrode.
 次に、上述の表示装置900の製造工程につき説明する。図6A~図6Fは、表示装置900の製造工程の概略図である。図6Aに示すように、ガラス基板41上にプラズマCVD法によりアモルファスシリコン薄膜71を堆積し、このアモルファスシリコン薄膜71をレーザ装置でアニール化して多結晶化する。レーザ装置からのレーザ光72は、図中にて矢印の方向に走査され、このレーザ光72が照射された領域は結晶化され多結晶シリコン膜73となる。次に図6Bに示すように、多結晶シリコン膜73を例えばフォトリソグラフィ法にてパターニングして、TFTの活性層74を形成する。次に図6Cに示すように、シリコン酸化膜によるゲート絶縁膜75を例えばプラズマCVD法で形成した後、例えばMo-W合金膜をスパッタ法等で成膜してパターニングすることでゲート電極76を形成する。パターニング時に走査線も同時に形成する。ゲート電極76を形成後に、ゲート電極76をマスクとして例えばイオンドーピング法で不純物を打ち込み、TFTのソース/ドレイン領域78を形成する。 Next, the manufacturing process of the display device 900 will be described. 6A to 6F are schematic views of the manufacturing process of the display device 900. FIG. As shown in FIG. 6A, an amorphous silicon thin film 71 is deposited on a glass substrate 41 by a plasma CVD method, and this amorphous silicon thin film 71 is annealed with a laser device to be polycrystallized. The laser beam 72 from the laser device is scanned in the direction of the arrow in the drawing, and the region irradiated with the laser beam 72 is crystallized to become a polycrystalline silicon film 73. Next, as shown in FIG. 6B, the polycrystalline silicon film 73 is patterned by, eg, photolithography to form an active layer 74 of the TFT. Next, as shown in FIG. 6C, a gate insulating film 75 made of a silicon oxide film is formed by, for example, a plasma CVD method, and then a gate electrode 76 is formed by patterning by forming, for example, a Mo—W alloy film by a sputtering method or the like. Form. Scan lines are also formed simultaneously during patterning. After the gate electrode 76 is formed, impurities are implanted by, for example, ion doping using the gate electrode 76 as a mask to form a source / drain region 78 of the TFT.
 次に図6Dに示すように、ゲート電極76上にプラズマCVD法でシリコン酸化膜による第1の層間絶縁膜77を形成する。次に図6Eに示すように、第1の層間絶縁膜77及びゲート絶縁膜75にコンタクトホールを形成後、スパッタ法でアルミニウム膜を形成してパターニングすることでソース/ドレイン電極79を形成する。このときに同時に信号線も形成する。次に図6Fに示すように、アルミニウム膜上に第2の層間絶縁膜83を形成する。そして、第2の層間絶縁膜83にコンタクトホールを形成し、更に画素電極23を形成する。 Next, as shown in FIG. 6D, a first interlayer insulating film 77 made of a silicon oxide film is formed on the gate electrode 76 by plasma CVD. Next, as shown in FIG. 6E, after forming contact holes in the first interlayer insulating film 77 and the gate insulating film 75, an aluminum film is formed by sputtering and patterned to form source / drain electrodes 79. At this time, a signal line is also formed. Next, as shown in FIG. 6F, a second interlayer insulating film 83 is formed on the aluminum film. Then, a contact hole is formed in the second interlayer insulating film 83, and a pixel electrode 23 is further formed.
 次に図6A~図6Fに示した工程と同様にして、ゲート電極、ソース/ドレイン電極、走査線、及び信号線を正面側に形成すると共にスパッタ法等により背面側に対向電極25を形成した第1透明基板を準備する。そして、第1透明基板11と第2透明基板12とを対向させて、周囲をシール材29で密閉して、内部にメモリ液晶層36の組成物を注入し、封入することで光散乱性液晶表示パネル200を形成する。 Next, similarly to the steps shown in FIGS. 6A to 6F, gate electrodes, source / drain electrodes, scanning lines, and signal lines are formed on the front side, and a counter electrode 25 is formed on the back side by sputtering or the like. A first transparent substrate is prepared. The first transparent substrate 11 and the second transparent substrate 12 are opposed to each other, the periphery is sealed with a sealing material 29, the composition of the memory liquid crystal layer 36 is injected therein, and the light scattering liquid crystal is sealed therein. A display panel 200 is formed.
 次に、上述の光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の製造方法と同様にして、第3透明基板13と第4透明基板14とを対向させ、周囲をシール材39で密閉して、内部に液晶層26の組成物を注入し、封入することで液晶表示パネル100を形成する。 Next, in the same manner as in the method for manufacturing the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 described above, the third transparent substrate 13 and the fourth transparent substrate 14 are opposed to each other, the periphery is sealed with a sealing material 39, and the liquid crystal layer is contained inside. The liquid crystal display panel 100 is formed by injecting and sealing 26 compositions.
 その後、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の第2透明基板12と液晶表示パネル100の第3透明基板13とを対向させて配置させて表示装置900が製造される。 Thereafter, the display device 900 is manufactured by arranging the second transparent substrate 12 of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 and the third transparent substrate 13 of the liquid crystal display panel 100 to face each other.
 このように表示装置900の製造工程の途中にて、上記光散乱性液晶表示パネル200と上記画像表示パネル100とを備える表示パネルが作製される。表示パネルは、表示領域90に複数の表示画素80を備えている。表示パネルの表示面の表示領域90は、明色表示及び暗色表示の組み合わせから成る明暗画像を表示する明暗画像表示エリアと、所定画像を表示する所定画像表示エリアとを有するように設定される。表示パネルは、後述する受光センサ180付きの表示パネルとすることも可能である。受光センサ180は、表示領域90に照射された外部光を表示領域90の複数の位置で受光するように配置されている。この受光センサ180付き表示パネルは、表示領域90に照射される外部光の影響によって表示領域90で生じる輝度分布のばらつきを調べることができる。 Thus, a display panel including the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 and the image display panel 100 is manufactured during the manufacturing process of the display device 900. The display panel includes a plurality of display pixels 80 in the display area 90. The display area 90 on the display surface of the display panel is set to have a light / dark image display area for displaying a light / dark image composed of a combination of bright color display and dark color display, and a predetermined image display area for displaying a predetermined image. The display panel may be a display panel with a light receiving sensor 180 described later. The light receiving sensor 180 is arranged to receive external light irradiated on the display area 90 at a plurality of positions in the display area 90. The display panel with the light receiving sensor 180 can examine variations in luminance distribution generated in the display area 90 due to the influence of external light irradiated on the display area 90.
 次に、上述の表示装置900の使用例につき説明する。ここではインターネットを経由して受信されるデジタルサイネージのコンテンツを表示する例を説明する。図7は、表示装置900と画像を表示させる画像信号を作成して表示装置900に送る外部処理装置421とを有するデジタルサイネージシステムとしての画像表示システム910のブロック図である。図7に示すように、画像表示システム910は、本発明に係る表示装置900が表示装置として使用される電子看板装置410と、特に限定されるものではないが例えばインターネット420等で結ばれた専用の外部処理装置421と、を有して構成される。電子看板装置410は、店舗や会社の出入り口等に設置されて、広告や社員向け情報等のコンテンツを表示する装置である。 Next, usage examples of the display device 900 will be described. Here, an example of displaying digital signage content received via the Internet will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram of an image display system 910 as a digital signage system that includes a display device 900 and an external processing device 421 that generates an image signal for displaying an image and sends the image signal to the display device 900. As shown in FIG. 7, the image display system 910 is not limited to a digital signage device 410 in which the display device 900 according to the present invention is used as a display device, but is dedicated to, for example, the Internet 420 or the like. And an external processing device 421. The electronic signboard device 410 is a device that is installed at an entrance of a store or a company and displays contents such as advertisements and information for employees.
 通信回路制御部411は、電子看板装置410をインターネット420経由で外部処理装置421に接続させる。提供されるコンテンツは、外部処理装置421から自動配信されるか、又は電子看板装置410を操作して所定のURLをURLメモリ414から入力するか、又は操作部415から手動入力して、外部処理装置421に接続してコンテンツを受信する。受信したコンテンツのデータは受信データメモリ412に一時的に記憶される。ブラウザメモリ413は、受信したコンテンツより所定の表示画面内容を生成するブラウザソフトを記憶している。コンテンツの表示出力は、操作部415を操作して、受信データメモリ412より必要なコンテンツを選択して読み取りを行い、該コンテンツのデータより表示画面信号を生成して表示装置900に表示する。 The communication circuit control unit 411 connects the electronic signboard device 410 to the external processing device 421 via the Internet 420. The provided content is automatically distributed from the external processing device 421, or a predetermined URL is input from the URL memory 414 by operating the electronic signage device 410, or manually input from the operation unit 415 to perform external processing. Connect to the device 421 to receive content. The received content data is temporarily stored in the received data memory 412. The browser memory 413 stores browser software that generates predetermined display screen contents from the received content. To display the content, the operation unit 415 is operated to select and read the necessary content from the reception data memory 412, and a display screen signal is generated from the content data and displayed on the display device 900.
 図8は、表示領域90に明暗画像表示エリア710と所定画像表示エリア720とを設定して表示する一具体例を示す図である。図8に示すように、画像表示制御部500は、明暗画像表示エリア710と所定画像表示エリア720とを設定して表示領域90に表示する。明暗画像表示エリア710には明暗画像711が表示されており、明暗画像711は特に限定されるものではないが、文字、数字、記号、図形、又はこれらの組み合わせからなる画像であり、例えば時刻、天気マーク等である。所定画像表示エリア720には所定画像721が表示されており、所定画像721は特に限定されるものではないが、例えばニューステロップ、ニュース映像等である。 FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a specific example in which a bright / dark image display area 710 and a predetermined image display area 720 are set and displayed in the display area 90. As shown in FIG. 8, the image display control unit 500 sets a bright and dark image display area 710 and a predetermined image display area 720 and displays them in the display area 90. A light / dark image 711 is displayed in the light / dark image display area 710, and the light / dark image 711 is not particularly limited, but is an image made up of letters, numbers, symbols, figures, or a combination thereof. Such as weather marks. A predetermined image 721 is displayed in the predetermined image display area 720, and the predetermined image 721 is not particularly limited, but is, for example, a news telop, a news video, or the like.
 次に、図4に示した3つの透明基板にて表示装置900を構成する場合を例示して、表示装置900の使用態様を説明する。図9は、表示装置900の使用態様を説明する断面図である。 Next, the usage mode of the display device 900 will be described by exemplifying the case where the display device 900 is configured by the three transparent substrates shown in FIG. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view illustrating how the display device 900 is used.
 図9に示すように、所定画像表示エリア720では、画像表示制御部500により、画素電極23と対向電極25との間に電圧を印加することにより、メモリ液晶層36における液晶分子38を配向状態にさせることで、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200のメモリ液晶層36を光透過状態に変化させる。そして、バックライト制御部501は、所定画像表示エリア720に対応するバックライト300の照射部302を点灯させる。これにより、表示装置900の液晶表示パネル100に例えば外部処理装置421から配信されるコンテンツは、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200を通過して観察者に認識される。 As shown in FIG. 9, in the predetermined image display area 720, the image display control unit 500 applies a voltage between the pixel electrode 23 and the counter electrode 25, thereby aligning the liquid crystal molecules 38 in the memory liquid crystal layer 36. Thus, the memory liquid crystal layer 36 of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 is changed to a light transmission state. Then, the backlight control unit 501 turns on the irradiation unit 302 of the backlight 300 corresponding to the predetermined image display area 720. Thereby, for example, content distributed from the external processing device 421 to the liquid crystal display panel 100 of the display device 900 passes through the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 and is recognized by the observer.
 一方、明暗画像表示エリア710では、表示装置900の光散乱性液晶表示パネル200に例えば外部処理装置421から配信されるコンテンツを表示する際は、画像表示制御部500により、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の所定箇所にて画素電極23と対向電極25との間の電界を形成しないでメモリ液晶層36における液晶分子38をランダム状態にし、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200のメモリ液晶層36を光散乱状態に変化させて、外部光を散乱させることにより、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200上の所定箇所に明色表示(例えば白色表示W)を行う。そして光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の他の箇所では画素電極23と対向電極25との間に電圧を印加することでメモリ液晶層36における液晶分子38を配向させ、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200のメモリ液晶層36を配向状態にして光透過状態に変化させて、暗色表示(例えば黒色表示B)を光散乱性液晶表示パネル200上に行う。また、画像表示制御部500は、液晶表示パネル100の液晶層26を光非透過状態にする。バックライト制御部501は、明暗画像表示エリア710に対応するバックライト300の照射部302を消灯させる。これにより該明色表示及び暗色表示の組み合わせから成る明暗画像を光散乱性液晶表示パネル200上に形成する。 On the other hand, in the bright / dark image display area 710, when displaying content distributed from, for example, the external processing device 421 on the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 of the display device 900, the light scattering liquid crystal display panel is displayed by the image display control unit 500. The liquid crystal molecules 38 in the memory liquid crystal layer 36 are set in a random state without forming an electric field between the pixel electrode 23 and the counter electrode 25 at a predetermined position 200, and the memory liquid crystal layer 36 of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 is light-scattered. By changing to a state and scattering external light, bright color display (for example, white display W) is performed at a predetermined location on the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200. In other parts of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200, a voltage is applied between the pixel electrode 23 and the counter electrode 25 to align the liquid crystal molecules 38 in the memory liquid crystal layer 36. A dark color display (for example, black display B) is performed on the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 by changing the memory liquid crystal layer 36 to an aligned state and a light transmitting state. Further, the image display control unit 500 puts the liquid crystal layer 26 of the liquid crystal display panel 100 into a light non-transmissive state. The backlight control unit 501 turns off the irradiation unit 302 of the backlight 300 corresponding to the light and dark image display area 710. As a result, a light / dark image composed of a combination of the light color display and the dark color display is formed on the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200.
 明暗画像表示エリア710におけるコンテンツ表示について、アクティブマトリクス型TFTの駆動を図5を参照して下記に説明する。ゲートドライバ110から走査信号を出力して、各走査線22を順にオンとし、これと同期して信号線21に映像信号をサンプリングすると、オンとなった走査線22に接続する全てのTFT24は、一水平走査期間だけオンとなり、信号線21にサンプリングされていた映像信号はTFT24を通じて画素電極23に書き込まれる。この映像信号は画素電極23と対向電極25との間に信号電圧として充電され、この信号電圧の有無即ち信号電圧の大きさに応じてメモリ液晶層36が配向状態又はランダム状態になり、各々の表示画素80についての白色表示又は黒色表示が制御される。このような動作を一フレーム期間内に全ての走査線22について実施することにより、コンテンツの映像が表示される。 Regarding the content display in the light and dark image display area 710, the driving of the active matrix TFT will be described below with reference to FIG. When the scanning signal is output from the gate driver 110 and each scanning line 22 is sequentially turned on, and the video signal is sampled on the signal line 21 in synchronization therewith, all the TFTs 24 connected to the scanning line 22 turned on are The video signal that has been sampled on the signal line 21 is written to the pixel electrode 23 through the TFT 24 during the period of one horizontal scanning. The video signal is charged as a signal voltage between the pixel electrode 23 and the counter electrode 25, and the memory liquid crystal layer 36 is in an oriented state or a random state depending on the presence or absence of the signal voltage, that is, the magnitude of the signal voltage. White display or black display for the display pixel 80 is controlled. By performing such an operation for all the scanning lines 22 within one frame period, a video of content is displayed.
 このように本実施形態に係る発明によれば、図8に示したように、明暗画像表示エリア710にて、白色表示及び黒色表示の組み合わせから成る明暗画像(例えば時刻表示)を光散乱性液晶表示パネル200上に表示することにより、消費電力を省力化させながらコンテンツ表示を行うことができる。そして所定画像表示エリア720にて例えば外部処理装置421から配信されるコンテンツを所定画像(例えばニューステロップ)として表示することができる。そのため、省電力状態でも、宣伝・識別媒体として十分に利用できる情報表示が可能となる。 As described above, according to the invention according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, in the light / dark image display area 710, a light / dark image (for example, time display) composed of a combination of white display and black display is displayed as a light scattering liquid crystal. By displaying on the display panel 200, it is possible to display content while saving power consumption. In the predetermined image display area 720, for example, content distributed from the external processing device 421 can be displayed as a predetermined image (for example, news telop). For this reason, even in a power saving state, it is possible to display information that can be sufficiently used as an advertisement / identification medium.
 《実施形態2》
 次に実施形態2においては、表示領域に照射された外部光の強度に応じて、所定画像表示エリアと明暗画像表示エリアとを設定する。
<< Embodiment 2 >>
Next, in the second embodiment, a predetermined image display area and a light / dark image display area are set according to the intensity of the external light applied to the display area.
 図10は、実施形態2に係る表示装置900の構造を概略的に説明するブロック図である。図10では、説明の便宜上、液晶表示パネル100を省略し、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200とバックライト300とを誇張分離して表している。光散乱性液晶表示パネル200は、画像を表示する領域である表示領域90と、その周囲に設けられた額縁状の非表示領域とを有している。 FIG. 10 is a block diagram schematically illustrating the structure of the display device 900 according to the second embodiment. In FIG. 10, for convenience of explanation, the liquid crystal display panel 100 is omitted, and the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 and the backlight 300 are exaggerated and separated. The light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 has a display area 90 that is an area for displaying an image, and a frame-shaped non-display area provided around the display area 90.
 受光センサ180は、表示領域90に照射された外部光を受光するためのものであり、例えば、表示領域90に分散して配置されている。このため、受光センサ180は、表示領域90における様々な部位において、表示領域90を照射している外部光の受光情報を得ることができる。 The light receiving sensor 180 is for receiving external light irradiated on the display area 90, and is arranged in a distributed manner in the display area 90, for example. For this reason, the light receiving sensor 180 can obtain light reception information of the external light that irradiates the display region 90 at various sites in the display region 90.
 受光センサ180は、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の平面視において複数の表示画素80の各々が形成された領域に配置されている。このため、表示領域90を照射する外部光の受光情報a1~d1を表示画素80単位で得ることができる。なお、受光センサ180の配置は、これに限らず、例えば、複数の表示画素からなる1つの画素群(8画素×8画素の画素群、10画素×10画素の画素群)毎に受光センサ180を設けてもよい。この場合、画素群毎に受光情報a1~d1を得ることができる。また、画素群は任意に設定することが可能である。 The light receiving sensor 180 is disposed in a region where each of the plurality of display pixels 80 is formed in a plan view of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200. For this reason, the light reception information a1 to d1 of the external light that irradiates the display region 90 can be obtained for each display pixel 80 unit. The arrangement of the light receiving sensor 180 is not limited to this. For example, the light receiving sensor 180 is provided for each pixel group (8 pixel × 8 pixel group, 10 pixel × 10 pixel group) composed of a plurality of display pixels. May be provided. In this case, the light reception information a1 to d1 can be obtained for each pixel group. In addition, the pixel group can be set arbitrarily.
 受光センサ180は、受光した光に応じて電気的な情報を生じさせるセンサを用いることができる。例えば、受光センサ180には、受光した外部光によって光起電力を生じさせるものを用いることができる。このような受光センサ180としては、例えば、フォトダイオード(photodiode)や、フォトトランジスタ(phototransistor)等を用いることができる。また、受光センサ180は、受光する光の強度に応じて電気抵抗が変化するフォトレジスタ(photoresistor)を用いることもできる。前記「受光情報」が具体的にどのような情報かは、センサの種類や回路構成等に応じて異なる。この実施形態では、受光センサ180としてフォトダイオードが用いられている。 The light receiving sensor 180 may be a sensor that generates electrical information according to the received light. For example, the light receiving sensor 180 may be a sensor that generates a photovoltaic force by the received external light. As such a light receiving sensor 180, for example, a photodiode, a phototransistor, or the like can be used. The light receiving sensor 180 may be a photoresistor whose electric resistance changes according to the intensity of received light. The specific information of the “light reception information” varies depending on the type of sensor, circuit configuration, and the like. In this embodiment, a photodiode is used as the light receiving sensor 180.
 次に、図11は、受光センサ180の配置位置を説明する光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の詳細な断面図である。図11に示すように、第2透明基板12と第1透明基板11との間には、スペーサ16が介在されている。第2透明基板12と第1透明基板11との間隔は、スペーサ16によって所定の間隔に維持されている。 Next, FIG. 11 is a detailed sectional view of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 for explaining the arrangement position of the light receiving sensor 180. As shown in FIG. 11, a spacer 16 is interposed between the second transparent substrate 12 and the first transparent substrate 11. The interval between the second transparent substrate 12 and the first transparent substrate 11 is maintained at a predetermined interval by the spacer 16.
 第2透明基板12は、ガラス基板41の正面側(つまり、メモリ液晶層36側)に各々形成された、画素電極23、信号線21、走査線22、制御信号線30、平坦化層44、配向膜46、及びTFT24等を備えている。 The second transparent substrate 12 includes a pixel electrode 23, a signal line 21, a scanning line 22, a control signal line 30, a planarization layer 44, which are formed on the front side of the glass substrate 41 (that is, the memory liquid crystal layer 36 side). An alignment film 46, a TFT 24, and the like are provided.
 第1透明基板11は、ガラス基板61のメモリ液晶層36側にブラックマトリクス62、カラーフィルター層63、平坦化層64、対向電極25及び配向膜66(水平配向膜)が形成されている。 In the first transparent substrate 11, a black matrix 62, a color filter layer 63, a planarizing layer 64, a counter electrode 25, and an alignment film 66 (horizontal alignment film) are formed on the glass substrate 61 on the memory liquid crystal layer 36 side.
 ブラックマトリクス62は、光が透過しない材料(例えば、Cr(クロム)等の金属)によって形成されており、各表示画素80を区画するように、カラーフィルター層63の間に設けられている。カラーフィルター層63は、色調を調整するフィルタである。カラーフィルター層63は、当該カラーフィルター層63の色以外に対応する波長の光を吸収することによって、透過光の色調を調整する。この実施形態では、1つの表示画素80に対して、赤(R)、緑(G)、青(B)3色のカラーフィルター層63が順に配置されている。 The black matrix 62 is formed of a material that does not transmit light (for example, a metal such as Cr (chromium)), and is provided between the color filter layers 63 so as to partition each display pixel 80. The color filter layer 63 is a filter that adjusts the color tone. The color filter layer 63 adjusts the color tone of the transmitted light by absorbing light having a wavelength corresponding to a color other than the color of the color filter layer 63. In this embodiment, three color filter layers 63 of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) are sequentially arranged for one display pixel 80.
 平坦化層64は、ブラックマトリクス62及びカラーフィルター層63を覆うように形成されている。また、この平坦化層64を覆うように対向電極25が形成されている。さらに、対向電極25を覆うように配向膜66が形成されている。配向膜66は、第2透明基板12の配向膜46と対向している。両基板11,12の配向膜46,66によって、電圧が印加されていない状態での液晶分子の配向方向が規定される。この実施形態では、配向膜66と配向膜46とは配向方向が90°異なっている。 The planarization layer 64 is formed so as to cover the black matrix 62 and the color filter layer 63. A counter electrode 25 is formed so as to cover the planarizing layer 64. Further, an alignment film 66 is formed so as to cover the counter electrode 25. The alignment film 66 faces the alignment film 46 of the second transparent substrate 12. The alignment films 46 and 66 of both the substrates 11 and 12 define the alignment direction of the liquid crystal molecules when no voltage is applied. In this embodiment, the alignment film 66 and the alignment film 46 differ in the alignment direction by 90 °.
 液晶表示パネル100についても、第3透明基板13と第4透明基板14との間に教示されているのが液晶層26であること以外は、基本的には上述の光散乱性液晶表示パネル200と同様の構造である。ここで、図4に示した3つの透明基板にて表示装置900を構成する場合を例示して、液晶表示パネル100側について説明するに、図12に示すように、共通透明基板15の背面内側にはカラーフィルター層は形成されていない。これは共通透明基板15の背面内側にもカラーフィルター層を形成すると、光透過性が悪くなり透明性が低下するからである。 Regarding the liquid crystal display panel 100 as well, the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 described above is basically the same except that the liquid crystal layer 26 is taught between the third transparent substrate 13 and the fourth transparent substrate 14. It is the same structure as. Here, the case where the display device 900 is configured with the three transparent substrates shown in FIG. 4 will be described as an example, and the liquid crystal display panel 100 side will be described. As shown in FIG. The color filter layer is not formed in. This is because if the color filter layer is also formed inside the back surface of the common transparent substrate 15, the light transmittance is deteriorated and the transparency is lowered.
 また、図12に示す実施形態以外に、共通透明基板15の正面内側に、画素毎を仕切るようにブラックマトリクスを設け、このブラックマトリクスの間にR(赤色)、G(緑色)、B(青色)を形成することも可能である。かかる場合も光透過性を低下させることを防止するために第4透明基板14の内側にはカラーフィルターを形成しない。 In addition to the embodiment shown in FIG. 12, a black matrix is provided inside the common transparent substrate 15 so as to partition each pixel, and R (red), G (green), and B (blue) are provided between the black matrices. ) Can also be formed. In such a case, a color filter is not formed inside the fourth transparent substrate 14 in order to prevent the light transmittance from being lowered.
 なお、図2に示した4つの透明基板にて表示装置900を構成する場合では、カラーフィルター層は第1透明基板の内側に形成され、第3透明基板13の背面内側にはカラーフィルター層は形成されない。また、カラーフィルター層を第2透明基板の正面内側に形成し、第4透明基板14の正面内側にカラーフィルター層を形成しないことも可能である。 In the case where the display device 900 is configured with the four transparent substrates shown in FIG. 2, the color filter layer is formed inside the first transparent substrate, and the color filter layer is formed inside the back surface of the third transparent substrate 13. Not formed. It is also possible to form the color filter layer inside the front surface of the second transparent substrate and not form the color filter layer inside the front surface of the fourth transparent substrate 14.
 次に、図13は、本実施形態に係る表示装置900の配線構造及び制御部を模式的に示すブロック図である。受光センサ180は、制御部550に接続されている。そして、光センサ180で生じた光起電力が「受光情報a1~d1」として制御部550に送られる。制御部550は、液晶表示パネル100、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200及びバックライト300に接続されている。また、制御部550には、受光センサ180及び外部処理装置421から信号が入力されるようになっている。 Next, FIG. 13 is a block diagram schematically showing a wiring structure and a control unit of the display device 900 according to the present embodiment. The light receiving sensor 180 is connected to the control unit 550. Then, the photovoltaic power generated by the optical sensor 180 is sent to the control unit 550 as “light reception information a1 to d1”. The control unit 550 is connected to the liquid crystal display panel 100, the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200, and the backlight 300. The control unit 550 receives signals from the light receiving sensor 180 and the external processing device 421.
 さらに、図14に示すように、各表示画素80には、TFT24と、液晶容量Clcと、補助容量Ccsとが形成されている。TFT24のゲート電極76は、走査線22に接続されている。TFT24のソース電極81は、信号線21に接続されている。 Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, each display pixel 80 is formed with a TFT 24, a liquid crystal capacitor Clc, and an auxiliary capacitor Ccs. The gate electrode 76 of the TFT 24 is connected to the scanning line 22. A source electrode 81 of the TFT 24 is connected to the signal line 21.
 補助容量Ccsは、第1電極91及び第2電極92を有している。第1電極91は、制御信号線30に接続される一方、第2電極92は、TFT24のドレイン電極93に接続されている。補助容量Ccsは、制御信号線30から制御信号を受けて、表示画素80に印加された電圧(液晶容量Clc)を維持する。また、液晶容量Clcは、画素電極23と対向電極25とを有している。画素電極23はTFT24のドレイン電極93に接続されている。 The auxiliary capacitor Ccs has a first electrode 91 and a second electrode 92. The first electrode 91 is connected to the control signal line 30, while the second electrode 92 is connected to the drain electrode 93 of the TFT 24. The auxiliary capacitor Ccs receives a control signal from the control signal line 30 and maintains the voltage (liquid crystal capacitor Clc) applied to the display pixel 80. Further, the liquid crystal capacitor Clc has a pixel electrode 23 and a counter electrode 25. The pixel electrode 23 is connected to the drain electrode 93 of the TFT 24.
 図13にもどり、外部処理装置421は、例えば当該表示装置900の管理者等が操作する複数のパソコン(PC)等によって構成され、表示される各画像の画像情報422及び優先情報423を有している。なお、外部処理装置421は、複数のパソコンによって構成する以外に、複数のパソコン等を有するネットワークによって構成してもよい。 Returning to FIG. 13, the external processing device 421 includes, for example, a plurality of personal computers (PCs) operated by an administrator of the display device 900 and the like, and has image information 422 and priority information 423 for each displayed image. ing. The external processing device 421 may be configured by a network having a plurality of personal computers in addition to a plurality of personal computers.
 前記画像情報422は、表示装置900に表示させる画像自体の情報であり、優先情報423は、各表示画像の優先度を示す情報である。そして、外部処理装置421は、前記画像情報422及び優先情報423を含むデジタル信号424を制御部550に供給するようになっている。 The image information 422 is information of the image itself displayed on the display device 900, and the priority information 423 is information indicating the priority of each display image. The external processing device 421 supplies a digital signal 424 including the image information 422 and priority information 423 to the control unit 550.
 制御部550は、電子的処理装置であって、液晶パネル制御部520と、バックライト制御部501と、信号入力部521と、電源522と、これらに接続された画像表示制御部500とを備えている。 The control unit 550 is an electronic processing device, and includes a liquid crystal panel control unit 520, a backlight control unit 501, a signal input unit 521, a power source 522, and an image display control unit 500 connected thereto. ing.
 制御部550は、受光センサ180及び外部処理装置421から入力された信号に基づいて、液晶表示パネル100、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200及びバックライト300を制御するように構成されている。信号入力部521には外部処理装置421からデジタル信号424が入力され、信号入力部521は入力されたデジタル信号424を画像表示制御部500に出力する。 The control unit 550 is configured to control the liquid crystal display panel 100, the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200, and the backlight 300 based on signals input from the light receiving sensor 180 and the external processing device 421. A digital signal 424 is input from the external processing device 421 to the signal input unit 521, and the signal input unit 521 outputs the input digital signal 424 to the image display control unit 500.
 画像表示制御部500では、受光センサ180よって得られた受光情報a1~d1に対して基準値が予め定められる。画像表示制御部500は、基準値を上回る受光情報a1~d1が受光センサ180によって得られた場合に、当該受光情報a1~d1に基づいて、明暗画像表示エリアと所定画像表示エリアとを設定して表示領域90に表示する。 In the image display control unit 500, reference values are predetermined for the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the light reception sensor 180. When the light reception information a1 to d1 exceeding the reference value is obtained by the light reception sensor 180, the image display control unit 500 sets the light / dark image display area and the predetermined image display area based on the light reception information a1 to d1. Are displayed in the display area 90.
 表示装置900は、予め定められた基準値を上回るような強度の強い外部光が表示領域90に照射された際に、強度の強い外部光が照射されている領域には明暗画像表示エリアを設定し、それ以外の領域に所定画像表示エリアを設定するため、表示情報を観察者に適切に伝達することができる。 When the display area 90 is irradiated with strong external light that exceeds a predetermined reference value, the display device 900 sets a bright and dark image display area in the area irradiated with the strong external light. In addition, since the predetermined image display area is set in other areas, the display information can be appropriately transmitted to the observer.
 ここで、図15は、画像表示制御部500の構成を示すブロック図である。画像表示制御部500は、図15に示すように、基準値設定部531と、画像出力設定部532と、信号解析部533と、画像出力制御部534とを有している。 Here, FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the image display control unit 500. As shown in FIG. 15, the image display control unit 500 includes a reference value setting unit 531, an image output setting unit 532, a signal analysis unit 533, and an image output control unit 534.
 基準値設定部531は、受光センサ180から入力された受光情報a1~d1に対して基準値を設定し、当該基準値を画像出力設定部532へ出力する機能を有している。画像出力設定部532は、前記基準値と、受光センサ180から入力された受光情報a1~d1とに基づいて、表示領域90における明暗画像表示エリアと所定画像表示エリアとを設定して表示領域90に表示する機能を有している。 The reference value setting unit 531 has a function of setting a reference value for the light reception information a 1 to d 1 input from the light receiving sensor 180 and outputting the reference value to the image output setting unit 532. The image output setting unit 532 sets a bright and dark image display area and a predetermined image display area in the display area 90 based on the reference value and the light reception information a1 to d1 input from the light receiving sensor 180, and displays the display area 90. It has a function to display.
 そして、画像出力設定部532は、前記設定した明暗画像表示エリアと所定画像表示エリアとに関する制御信号を各々画像出力制御部534又はバックライト制御部501へ出力するようになっている。 The image output setting unit 532 outputs control signals related to the set bright / dark image display area and the predetermined image display area to the image output control unit 534 or the backlight control unit 501, respectively.
 信号解析部533は、信号入力部521で受信されたデジタル信号に含まれる画像情報及び優先情報を解析して画像出力制御部534に出力する。画像出力制御部534は、前記画像出力設定部532によって設定された明暗画像表示エリアに応じて明暗画像の大きさを変更する制御機能を有する。更に画像出力制御部534は、前記画像出力設定部532によって設定された所定画像表示エリアに応じて所定画像の大きさを変更する制御機能を有する。そして、画像出力制御部534は、制御された画像信号を液晶パネル制御部520へ出力する。 The signal analysis unit 533 analyzes the image information and priority information included in the digital signal received by the signal input unit 521 and outputs the image information and the priority information to the image output control unit 534. The image output control unit 534 has a control function of changing the size of the light / dark image according to the light / dark image display area set by the image output setting unit 532. Further, the image output control unit 534 has a control function of changing the size of the predetermined image in accordance with the predetermined image display area set by the image output setting unit 532. Then, the image output control unit 534 outputs the controlled image signal to the liquid crystal panel control unit 520.
 液晶パネル制御部520は、電源522に接続されると共に、画像表示制御部500から供給される画像信号に基づいて光散乱性液晶表示パネル200を制御し、メモリ液晶層36の光透過性を調整する。 The liquid crystal panel control unit 520 is connected to the power source 522 and controls the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 based on the image signal supplied from the image display control unit 500 to adjust the light transmittance of the memory liquid crystal layer 36. To do.
 詳しく説明すると、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の走査線22(1)~(m)は、ゲートドライバ110に接続されており、信号線21(1)~(n)は、ソースドライバ120に接続されている。また、ゲートドライバ110及びソースドライバ120は、各々液晶パネル制御部520に接続されている。 More specifically, the scanning lines 22 (1) to (m) of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 are connected to the gate driver 110, and the signal lines 21 (1) to (n) are connected to the source driver 120. Has been. Further, the gate driver 110 and the source driver 120 are each connected to the liquid crystal panel control unit 520.
 液晶パネル制御部520は、タイミングコントローラ525を有し、画像信号に基づいて作成した液晶パネル制御信号をゲートドライバ110及びソースドライバ120に供給する。このとき、タイミングコントローラ525は、液晶パネル制御信号をゲートドライバ110とソースドライバ120に送信するタイミングを調整している。そうして、画像信号に基づいて、明暗画像表示エリアに明暗画像を表示すると共に、所定画像表示エリアに所定画像を表示するようになっている。 The liquid crystal panel control unit 520 includes a timing controller 525 and supplies a liquid crystal panel control signal created based on the image signal to the gate driver 110 and the source driver 120. At this time, the timing controller 525 adjusts the timing for transmitting the liquid crystal panel control signal to the gate driver 110 and the source driver 120. Thus, based on the image signal, a light and dark image is displayed in the light and dark image display area, and a predetermined image is displayed in the predetermined image display area.
 電源522は、表示装置900の各構成部に動作電源を供給する。また、電源522は、図13に示すように、動作電源の他に、第1透明基板11の対向電極25への共通電極電圧(Vcom)の供給も行っている。対向電極25に供給された共通電極電圧(Vcom)は、第2透明基板12及び第1透明基板11の間に挟まれたメモリ液晶層36を印加する電圧として用いられる。 The power source 522 supplies operating power to each component of the display device 900. Further, as shown in FIG. 13, the power source 522 supplies the common electrode voltage (Vcom) to the counter electrode 25 of the first transparent substrate 11 in addition to the operation power source. The common electrode voltage (Vcom) supplied to the counter electrode 25 is used as a voltage for applying the memory liquid crystal layer 36 sandwiched between the second transparent substrate 12 and the first transparent substrate 11.
 バックライト制御部501は、受光センサ180によって得られた受光情報a1~d1に基づいて、表示領域90を分割した複数のエリアA~D毎に、複数の照射部302を制御して照明光の明るさ(輝度)を調整する機能を有している。 The backlight control unit 501 controls the plurality of irradiation units 302 for each of the plurality of areas A to D obtained by dividing the display area 90 based on the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the light reception sensor 180, thereby controlling the illumination light. It has a function of adjusting brightness (luminance).
 即ち、バックライト制御部501は、画像出力設定部532から供給された制御信号に基づいて、バックライト制御信号a2~d2を作成する。このバックライト制御信号a2~d2に基づいて制御された電力が、バックライト300の照射部302に投入される。これによって、バックライト300から照射される照明光が調整される。そして、バックライト制御部501は、前記複数の領域(A~D)のうち所定画像表示エリアを含む領域における照明光の輝度を高めるように構成されている。このようにして、制御部550は表示領域90に所望の画像を表示する。 That is, the backlight control unit 501 creates the backlight control signals a2 to d2 based on the control signal supplied from the image output setting unit 532. Electric power controlled based on the backlight control signals a2 to d2 is input to the irradiation unit 302 of the backlight 300. As a result, the illumination light emitted from the backlight 300 is adjusted. The backlight control unit 501 is configured to increase the luminance of illumination light in a region including a predetermined image display area among the plurality of regions (A to D). In this way, the control unit 550 displays a desired image in the display area 90.
 制御部550の信号入力部521にデジタル信号424が入力されると、信号入力部521は、入力されたデジタル信号424を画像表示制御部500の信号解析部533へ出力する。信号解析部533は、デジタル信号424に含まれる画像情報及び優先情報を解析した信号を画像出力制御部534に出力する。 When the digital signal 424 is input to the signal input unit 521 of the control unit 550, the signal input unit 521 outputs the input digital signal 424 to the signal analysis unit 533 of the image display control unit 500. The signal analysis unit 533 outputs a signal obtained by analyzing the image information and priority information included in the digital signal 424 to the image output control unit 534.
 図16は、表示装置900の制御方法を示すフローチャートである。図16のステップS101において、表示領域90に入射する光の受光情報a1~d1を複数の受光センサ180によって取得する(第1ステップ)。受光センサ180は、外部光として、表示装置900が設置されている周囲の光を受光すると共に、表示領域90に直接に照射される太陽光を受光する。周囲光よりも強い太陽光Lが表示領域90に直接に照射されると、観察者は、その太陽光Lの照射領域における画像を視認し難くなる。 FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a method for controlling the display device 900. In step S101 of FIG. 16, light reception information a1 to d1 of light incident on the display area 90 is acquired by the plurality of light reception sensors 180 (first step). The light receiving sensor 180 receives, as external light, ambient light where the display device 900 is installed, and also receives sunlight directly irradiated on the display area 90. When the sunlight L stronger than the ambient light is directly applied to the display area 90, it becomes difficult for the observer to visually recognize the image in the irradiation area of the sunlight L.
 受光センサ180が取得した受光情報a1~d1は、図15に示すように、基準値設定部531及び画像出力設定部532へ出力される。基準値設定部531は、前記受光情報a1~d1に基づいて基準値を設定し、当該基準値を画像出力設定部532へ出力する。例えば、基準値は、周囲光が照射されている表示領域90の受光情報a1~d1よりも所定値だけ大きい値として設定することが可能である。 The light reception information a1 to d1 acquired by the light reception sensor 180 is output to the reference value setting unit 531 and the image output setting unit 532 as shown in FIG. The reference value setting unit 531 sets a reference value based on the light reception information a 1 to d 1 and outputs the reference value to the image output setting unit 532. For example, the reference value can be set as a value that is larger by a predetermined value than the received light information a1 to d1 of the display area 90 irradiated with ambient light.
 次に、図16のステップS102において、画像出力設定部532は、基準値を上回る受光情報a1~d1が得られた部位の面積が、表示領域90の面積に対して一定の割合を上回ったか否かを判断する。 Next, in step S102 of FIG. 16, the image output setting unit 532 determines whether the area of the part where the received light information a1 to d1 exceeding the reference value has exceeded a certain ratio with respect to the area of the display region 90. Determine whether.
 ここで、図17は、外部光としての太陽光Lが表示領域90に直接に照射されている表示装置900を示す平面図である。例えば、図8に示すように、太陽光Lが表示領域90に直接に照射されていないときは、ステップS102において、基準値を上回る受光情報a1~d1が得られた部位の面積が前記一定の割合を下回るため、ステップS103には進まない。この場合、図8に示すように、外部光としての太陽光Lが表示領域90に直接に照射されていない場合は、例えば、明暗画像表示エリア710を表示領域90の下に表示して、所定画像表示エリア720を表示領域90の上に表示し、各々は等しい面積にて均等に配置して表示される。 Here, FIG. 17 is a plan view showing a display device 900 in which sunlight L as external light is directly irradiated on the display region 90. FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 8, when the sunlight L is not directly irradiated to the display area 90, the area of the part where the received light information a1 to d1 exceeding the reference value is obtained in step S102 is the fixed area. Since the ratio is below, the process does not proceed to step S103. In this case, as shown in FIG. 8, when the sunlight L as the external light is not directly applied to the display area 90, for example, a bright and dark image display area 710 is displayed below the display area 90, An image display area 720 is displayed on the display area 90, and each is displayed with an equal area.
 一方、ステップS102において、太陽光Lが表示領域90の一部に直接に照射されていて、基準値を上回る受光情報a1~d1が得られた部位の面積が前記一定の割合を上回るときには、ステップS103に進む。 On the other hand, when the sunlight L is directly irradiated on a part of the display region 90 in step S102 and the area of the part where the received light information a1 to d1 exceeding the reference value is obtained exceeds the certain ratio, the step The process proceeds to S103.
 ステップS103において、画像出力設定部532は、その受光情報a1~d1に基づいて、明暗画像表示エリア710と所定画像表示エリア720とを設定する。所定画像表示エリア720は、図17に示すように、表示領域90のうち基準値を上回る受光情報を得た部位(つまり、表示領域90のうち太陽光Lが直接に照射されている直接照射領域)を除いた領域(つまり、表示領域90における直接照射領域以外の比較的暗い領域)に設定し、なるべく大きな面積となるように設定する。例えば所定画像721がニューステロップである場合は、観察者に認識しやすい程度の大きな文字にて一段表示を行うことができる。 In step S103, the image output setting unit 532 sets the light / dark image display area 710 and the predetermined image display area 720 based on the light reception information a1 to d1. As shown in FIG. 17, the predetermined image display area 720 is a part of the display area 90 that has received light reception information that exceeds the reference value (that is, the direct irradiation area in which the sunlight L is directly irradiated in the display area 90. ) (That is, a relatively dark area other than the direct irradiation area in the display area 90), and set to have as large an area as possible. For example, when the predetermined image 721 is a news telop, it is possible to perform one-step display with large characters that are easily recognized by an observer.
 続いて、画像出力設定部532は、図17に示すように、表示領域90における所定画像表示エリア720以外の領域に明暗画像表示エリア710を設定する。明暗画像表示エリア710は、所定画像表示エリア720に重ならない範囲でなるべく大きく設定される。このとき、画像出力設定部532は、所定画像表示エリア720の座標情報を画像解析により検出して、当該所定画像表示エリア720以外の領域(つまり、空き領域)に明暗画像表示エリア710を設定する。本実施形態における明暗画像表示エリア710は、表示領域90のうち基準値を上回る受光情報を得た部位を除いた領域から、太陽光Lが照射されている領域に亘って配置されている。即ち、前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた領域に、明暗画像表示エリア710の主領域を設定する。 Subsequently, the image output setting unit 532 sets a light and dark image display area 710 in an area other than the predetermined image display area 720 in the display area 90 as shown in FIG. The bright / dark image display area 710 is set as large as possible within a range that does not overlap the predetermined image display area 720. At this time, the image output setting unit 532 detects the coordinate information of the predetermined image display area 720 by image analysis, and sets the light and dark image display area 710 in an area other than the predetermined image display area 720 (that is, an empty area). . The bright and dark image display area 710 in the present embodiment is arranged over a region where the sunlight L is irradiated from a region excluding a portion of the display region 90 where light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained. That is, the main area of the light / dark image display area 710 is set in an area where light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained.
 前記画像解析の方法としては、例えば、表示領域90における所定画像表示エリア720以外の背景領域に、所定色や所定パターンの画像を形成し、この所定色や所定パターンを検出することにより、所定画像表示エリア720の範囲を示す座標を求めることが可能である。 As the image analysis method, for example, an image of a predetermined color or a predetermined pattern is formed in a background area other than the predetermined image display area 720 in the display area 90, and the predetermined image is detected by detecting the predetermined color or the predetermined pattern. Coordinates indicating the range of the display area 720 can be obtained.
 このようにすれば、明暗画像が所定画像に重ならないようにして、所定画像の視認性低下を抑制できる。そして、外部光が照射されていない比較的暗い領域に所定画像表示エリア720を設けてそこに所定画像721を表示するので、外部光により所定画像721が見難くなりにくい。更に、外部光が照射されている領域に明暗画像表示エリア710を設けてそこに明暗画像711を表示するため、光散乱状態の光散乱性液晶層に外部光が照射されて明色表示がクリアに表示され、コントラスト良く明暗画像711を表示できる。また、所定画像表示エリア720及び明暗画像表示エリア710における照射部302の輝度を各々別個独立に制御して、所定画像表示エリア720における所定画像と、明暗画像表示エリア710における明暗画像とを各々適切な明るさで表示することができ、観察者の視認性をより高めることが可能になる。 In this way, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the predetermined image from being lowered by preventing the light and dark image from overlapping the predetermined image. Since the predetermined image display area 720 is provided in a relatively dark area that is not irradiated with external light and the predetermined image 721 is displayed there, it is difficult for the predetermined image 721 to be difficult to see due to external light. Further, since a light / dark image display area 710 is provided in the area irradiated with external light and the light / dark image 711 is displayed there, the light scattering liquid crystal layer in the light scattering state is irradiated with external light to clear the bright color display. The bright and dark image 711 can be displayed with good contrast. In addition, the brightness of the irradiation unit 302 in the predetermined image display area 720 and the light / dark image display area 710 is controlled independently of each other so that the predetermined image in the predetermined image display area 720 and the light / dark image in the light / dark image display area 710 are appropriately Display with high brightness, and the visibility of the observer can be further enhanced.
 尚、所定画像及び明暗画像の総数が3以上の複数である場合、画像出力設定部532は、所定画像表示エリア720に単数又は複数の所定画像を表示し、明暗画像表示エリア710に単数又は複数の明暗画像を表示する。このとき、複数の明暗画像の各々の面積は、当該明暗画像表示エリア710に表示される明暗画像の優先度が低くなるに連れて、小さくすることが可能である。また、複数の所定画像の各々の面積は、当該所定画像表示エリア720に表示される所定画像の優先度が低くなるに連れて、小さくすることが可能である。 When the total number of the predetermined image and the light / dark image is a plurality of three or more, the image output setting unit 532 displays the single or plural predetermined images in the predetermined image display area 720 and the single or plural images in the light / dark image display area 710. Displays the light and dark images. At this time, the area of each of the plurality of light and dark images can be reduced as the priority of the light and dark images displayed in the light and dark image display area 710 decreases. In addition, the area of each of the plurality of predetermined images can be reduced as the priority of the predetermined image displayed in the predetermined image display area 720 decreases.
 次に、図16のステップS104において、画像出力制御部534は、前記所定画像表示エリア720の大きさに応じて所定画像の大きさを変更する。即ち、画像出力制御部534は、例えば、図17に示すように、表示領域90における直接照射領域以外の比較的暗い領域に設定された所定画像表示エリア720に、所定画像がなるべく大きく配置されるように、当該所定画像を拡大又は縮小する。また、画像出力制御部534は、前記明暗画像表示エリア710の大きさに応じて明暗画像の大きさを変更する。即ち、画像出力制御部534は、例えば、図17に示すように、表示領域90における明暗画像表示エリア710に、明暗画像がなるべく大きく配置されるように、当該明暗画像を拡大又は縮小する。そして、画像出力制御部534は、当該画像信号424を液晶パネル制御部520に出力する。 Next, in step S104 of FIG. 16, the image output control unit 534 changes the size of the predetermined image according to the size of the predetermined image display area 720. That is, the image output control unit 534 arranges the predetermined image as large as possible in the predetermined image display area 720 set in a relatively dark area other than the direct irradiation area in the display area 90 as shown in FIG. As described above, the predetermined image is enlarged or reduced. Further, the image output control unit 534 changes the size of the light / dark image according to the size of the light / dark image display area 710. That is, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 17, the image output control unit 534 enlarges or reduces the light / dark image so that the light / dark image is arranged as large as possible in the light / dark image display area 710 in the display area 90. Then, the image output control unit 534 outputs the image signal 424 to the liquid crystal panel control unit 520.
 液晶パネル制御部520は、画像信号424に基づいて作成した液晶パネル制御信号をゲートドライバ110及びソースドライバ120に供給する。そのことにより、画像出力制御部534により各々拡大又は縮小された所定画像及び明暗画像が互いに合成されて表示領域90に表示される。 The liquid crystal panel control unit 520 supplies a liquid crystal panel control signal created based on the image signal 424 to the gate driver 110 and the source driver 120. As a result, the predetermined image and the light and dark image respectively enlarged or reduced by the image output control unit 534 are combined and displayed on the display area 90.
 また、図16のステップS105において、バックライト制御部501は、画像出力設定部532から受けた制御信号に基づいて、所定画像表示エリア720を含むエリアA~Dにおけるバックライト300の照射部302を制御し、その照射部302の輝度を高める。そのことによって、所定画像をより視認しやすくすることができる。 In step S105 in FIG. 16, the backlight control unit 501 controls the irradiation unit 302 of the backlight 300 in the areas A to D including the predetermined image display area 720 based on the control signal received from the image output setting unit 532. And the luminance of the irradiation unit 302 is increased. This makes it easier to visually recognize the predetermined image.
 なお、前記画像出力設定部532は、特に、所定画像及び明暗画像の総数が3以上の複数となる場合には、これらの画像の移動距離の合計が最小となるように、前記所定画像表示エリア720及び明暗画像表示エリア710を設定することが好ましい。このようにすれば、観察者が移動後の各画像を容易に認識できることとなる。 The image output setting unit 532 is configured to display the predetermined image display area so that the total moving distance of these images is minimized, particularly when the total number of the predetermined images and the light and dark images is three or more. It is preferable to set 720 and a bright and dark image display area 710. In this way, the observer can easily recognize each image after movement.
 また、表示領域90の中央部分に配置された受光センサ180によって取得された受光情報に基づいて、所定画像等の表示制御を行うようにしてもよい。 Further, display control of a predetermined image or the like may be performed based on the light reception information acquired by the light reception sensor 180 disposed in the center portion of the display area 90.
 この場合、画像表示制御部500の基準値設定部531は、表示領域90の中央部分に配置された受光センサ180によって取得された受光情報に基づいて基準値を設定し、当該基準値を画像出力設定部532へ出力する。画像出力設定部532は、前記受光情報が基準値を上回った場合に、その受光情報に基づいて所定画像表示エリア720を設定する。そうして、上述の制御と同様に、液晶パネル制御部520によって前記所定画像表示エリア720に所定画像が表示される。このようにすれば、表示領域90の中央部分に配置した少ない数の受光センサ180によって、観察者の視認不良によるストレスを低減することができる。 In this case, the reference value setting unit 531 of the image display control unit 500 sets a reference value based on the light receiving information acquired by the light receiving sensor 180 disposed in the central portion of the display area 90, and outputs the reference value as an image. Output to the setting unit 532. The image output setting unit 532 sets a predetermined image display area 720 based on the light reception information when the light reception information exceeds a reference value. Then, the predetermined image is displayed in the predetermined image display area 720 by the liquid crystal panel control unit 520 in the same manner as the above-described control. In this way, the stress due to the poor visual recognition of the observer can be reduced by the small number of light receiving sensors 180 arranged in the central portion of the display area 90.
 また、画像表示制御部500は、複数の受光センサ180のうち予め定められた基準となる受光センサ180によって得られた受光情報a1~d1と、その他の受光センサ180によって得られた受光情報a1~d1との差分を求め、当該受光情報a1~d1の差分に基づいて所定画像等の表示を制御するとよい。 In addition, the image display control unit 500 receives light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by a light reception sensor 180 serving as a predetermined reference among the plurality of light reception sensors 180, and light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by other light reception sensors 180. It is preferable to obtain a difference from d1 and control display of a predetermined image or the like based on the difference between the received light information a1 to d1.
 この場合、基準となる受光センサ180は、予めバックライト制御部501に設定しておくとよい。また、基準となる受光センサ180によって得られた受光情報a1~d1と、その他の受光センサ180によって得られた受光情報a1~d1との差分に対して所定画像等の表示をどのように制御するかについては、画像表示制御部500に予め設定してもよい。この場合、画像表示制御部500は、表示領域90における外部光の強度分布を正確に反映して、所定画像721等の表示を好適に制御することができる。 In this case, the reference light receiving sensor 180 may be set in the backlight control unit 501 in advance. Further, how to control the display of a predetermined image or the like with respect to the difference between the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the reference light reception sensor 180 and the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the other light reception sensors 180 is controlled. This may be preset in the image display control unit 500. In this case, the image display control unit 500 can appropriately control the display of the predetermined image 721 and the like by accurately reflecting the intensity distribution of the external light in the display area 90.
 また、画像表示制御部500は、予め定められた複数のタイミングにおいて、同一の受光センサ180によって得られた受光情報a1~d1の差分を求め、当該受光情報a1~d1の差分に基づいて所定画像等の表示を各々制御してもよい。これによって、画像表示制御部500は、受光センサ180によって得られた受光情報a1~d1の経時的な変化量を正確に反映して、所定画像等の表示を制御することができる。 Further, the image display control unit 500 obtains the difference between the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the same light reception sensor 180 at a plurality of predetermined timings, and determines a predetermined image based on the difference between the light reception information a1 to d1. Etc. may be controlled respectively. Thus, the image display control unit 500 can accurately control the display of a predetermined image or the like by accurately reflecting the amount of change over time of the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the light reception sensor 180.
 また、表示装置900の前を人が通行する等によって、表示領域90を照射する外部光が一時的に遮られると、受光センサ180によって得られる受光情報a1~d1が一時的に大きく変化する。このときに得られた受光情報a1~d1に基づいて所定画像等の表示を制御すると、各画像の配置や大きさが不必要に変化してしまう。 In addition, when external light that irradiates the display area 90 is temporarily interrupted by a person passing in front of the display device 900, the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the light receiving sensor 180 temporarily changes greatly. If display of a predetermined image or the like is controlled based on the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained at this time, the arrangement and size of each image change unnecessarily.
 かかる不良を防ぐために、画像表示制御部500は、予め定められた時間に継続して、一定の受光情報a1~d1が受光センサ180によって得られた場合に、当該一定の受光情報a1~d1に基づいて所定画像等の表示を各々制御する。 In order to prevent such a failure, the image display control unit 500 continues the predetermined light reception information a1 to d1 when the constant light reception information a1 to d1 is obtained by the light reception sensor 180 for a predetermined time. Based on this, display of a predetermined image or the like is controlled.
 《実施形態3》
 上述の実施形態2では、所定画像表示エリア720を表示領域90のうち基準値を上回る受光情報を得た部位を除いた領域に設定し、そして、明暗画像表示エリア710は、その主領域が前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた領域に設定した。しかし、本発明の範囲はこのような実施形態に限定されない。以下に表示領域90における明暗画像表示エリア710と所定画像表示エリア720と表示態様の変形例を説明する。図18~図22は、各々、明暗画像表示エリア710及び所定画像表示エリア720の表示態様の変形例を説明する図である。
<< Embodiment 3 >>
In the above-described second embodiment, the predetermined image display area 720 is set to an area excluding the part of the display area 90 where the received light information exceeding the reference value is obtained, and the main area of the light / dark image display area 710 is the above-described area. It was set in an area where received light information exceeding the reference value was obtained. However, the scope of the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. In the following, a modified example of the bright / dark image display area 710, the predetermined image display area 720 and the display mode in the display area 90 will be described. 18 to 22 are diagrams for explaining modifications of the display modes of the light and dark image display area 710 and the predetermined image display area 720, respectively.
 まず、図18においては、明暗画像表示エリア710は、その主領域が前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた領域に設定されている。そのため明暗画像表示エリア710の中央部712は、基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた領域から少しはみ出ている。所定画像表示エリア720は、前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた部位を除いた領域に、少なくとも前記所定画像表示エリア720の中央部722を位置するように設定されている。この表示態様によれば、観察者は画像の中央部を優先的に認識する傾向があるため、所定画像表示エリア720の中央部722を前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた部位を除いた領域に位置させることにより、観察者に所定画像721を違和感無く認識させることが可能となる。 First, in FIG. 18, the light / dark image display area 710 is set to an area in which light reception information whose main area exceeds the reference value is obtained. Therefore, the central portion 712 of the bright / dark image display area 710 slightly protrudes from the region where the received light information exceeding the reference value is obtained. The predetermined image display area 720 is set so that at least a central portion 722 of the predetermined image display area 720 is located in an area excluding a portion where light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained. According to this display mode, since the observer tends to recognize the central portion of the image with priority, the central portion 722 of the predetermined image display area 720 is excluded from the portion where the received light information exceeding the reference value is obtained. By locating in the region, it is possible for the observer to recognize the predetermined image 721 without a sense of incongruity.
 次に、図19においては、所定画像表示エリア720は、その主領域が前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた部位を除いた領域に設定されている。そのため所定画像表示エリア720の中央部722は、基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた部位を除いた領域から少しはみ出ている。明暗画像表示エリア710は、前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた領域に、少なくともその中央部712を位置するように設定されている。この表示態様によれば、所定画像表示エリア720の主領域を前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた部位を除いた領域に設定しているため、所定画像表示エリア720を比較的大きく設定することができ、そのため所定画像721がニューステロップである場合は、実施形態1と異なり二段表示を行うことも可能である。 Next, in FIG. 19, the predetermined image display area 720 is set to an area excluding a part where the main area has received light reception information exceeding the reference value. For this reason, the central portion 722 of the predetermined image display area 720 slightly protrudes from the region excluding the portion where the received light information exceeding the reference value is obtained. The bright / dark image display area 710 is set so that at least the central portion 712 is located in a region where the received light information exceeding the reference value is obtained. According to this display mode, since the main area of the predetermined image display area 720 is set to an area excluding a part where light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained, the predetermined image display area 720 is set to be relatively large. Therefore, unlike the first embodiment, when the predetermined image 721 is a news telop, it is possible to perform two-stage display.
 次に、図20においては、所定画像表示エリア720は、その主領域が前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた部位を除いた領域に設定されている。明暗画像表示エリア710は、前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた領域に設定されている。この表示態様によれば、明暗画像711全てが前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた領域に収まっているため、観察者は明暗画像711を正確に認識することができる。 Next, in FIG. 20, the predetermined image display area 720 is set to an area excluding the part where the main area has received light reception information exceeding the reference value. The bright / dark image display area 710 is set in an area where light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained. According to this display mode, since all the light and dark images 711 are within the region where the received light information exceeding the reference value is obtained, the observer can accurately recognize the light and dark images 711.
 次に、図21においては、明暗画像表示エリア710は、前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた領域に設定されている。そして所定画像表示エリア720は前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた部位を除いた領域に設定されている。そのため、この表示態様によれば、明暗画像711及び所定画像721の双方を観察者に正確に認識させることができる。一方、表示領域90には、所定画像表示エリア720及び明暗画像表示エリア710以外に、例えば第3エリア730が設定されている。この第3エリア730は、所定画像表示エリア720及び明暗画像表示エリア710以外の領域に設けられるエリアであって表示又は非表示を行うものであり、第3エリア730を設けることにより表示領域90における表示のバリエーションを増加させることが可能となる。第3エリア730において表示を行う場合、表示態様は特に限定されるものではないが、例えば、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200のメモリ液晶層36を光透過状態にし、液晶表示パネル100にて光を点滅させる電飾を表示させて観察者の注意を引く表示を行うことも可能である。また、第3エリア730において画像を表示しない場合は、表示領域90における第3エリア730の割合だけ省電力化が可能となる。 Next, in FIG. 21, the light and dark image display area 710 is set to an area where light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained. The predetermined image display area 720 is set in an area excluding a part where light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained. Therefore, according to this display mode, it is possible to cause the observer to recognize both the bright and dark image 711 and the predetermined image 721 accurately. On the other hand, in the display area 90, for example, a third area 730 is set in addition to the predetermined image display area 720 and the bright and dark image display area 710. The third area 730 is an area provided in a region other than the predetermined image display area 720 and the bright / dark image display area 710 and performs display or non-display. By providing the third area 730, the third area 730 is displayed in the display region 90. Display variations can be increased. When display is performed in the third area 730, the display mode is not particularly limited. For example, the memory liquid crystal layer 36 of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 is set in a light-transmitting state, and light is transmitted through the liquid crystal display panel 100. It is also possible to display the flashing electrical decoration to draw the viewer's attention. Further, when no image is displayed in the third area 730, it is possible to save power by the proportion of the third area 730 in the display area 90.
 なお、第3エリア730の形状は特に限定されるものではなく、例えば図21に示した形状のみならず、図22に示すように第3エリア730の形状を図21に示した形状よりも大きく設定することも可能である。例えば第3エリア730を非表示とする場合は、第3エリア730の面積を大きく設定することにより、省電力化を促進させることができる。 The shape of the third area 730 is not particularly limited. For example, the shape of the third area 730 is larger than the shape shown in FIG. 21 as shown in FIG. 22 as well as the shape shown in FIG. It is also possible to set. For example, when the third area 730 is not displayed, power saving can be promoted by setting the area of the third area 730 large.
 《実施形態4》
 図23は、外部光としての太陽光Lが表示領域90に直接に照射されている表示装置900を示す平面図である。前記実施形態2及び実施形態3では、拡大又は縮小した所定画像721を表示する所定画像表示エリア720と、拡大又は縮小した明暗画像711を表示する明暗画像表示エリア710とを外部光が照射されている領域に対応させて各々設定したのに対し、本実施形態は、所定画像表示エリア720及び明暗画像表示エリア710を単に上下(又は左右)に入れ替えて表示するようにしたものである。
<< Embodiment 4 >>
FIG. 23 is a plan view showing a display device 900 in which sunlight L as external light is directly applied to the display area 90. In the second and third embodiments, external light is applied to the predetermined image display area 720 that displays the enlarged or reduced predetermined image 721 and the light / dark image display area 710 that displays the enlarged or reduced light / dark image 711. In the present embodiment, the predetermined image display area 720 and the bright / dark image display area 710 are simply switched up and down (or left and right) for display.
 即ち、本実施形態における画像表示制御部500は、表示領域90を面積が互いに等しい上下の2つの領域に分けた場合に、前記2つの領域のうち受光センサ180により前記基準値を上回る受光情報a1~d1が得られた部位の面積が小さい一方の領域に所定画像表示エリア720を設定する一方、他方の領域に明暗画像表示エリア710を設定するように構成されている。 That is, the image display control unit 500 according to the present embodiment, when the display region 90 is divided into two upper and lower regions having the same area, the light reception information a1 that exceeds the reference value by the light receiving sensor 180 in the two regions. The predetermined image display area 720 is set in one area where the area of the region where d1 is obtained is small, and the light and dark image display area 710 is set in the other area.
 本実施形態における表示装置900を制御する場合には、実施形態1と同様に、図12におけるステップS101及びS102を行う。続いて、ステップS103において、画像出力設定部532は、得られた受光情報a1~d1に基づいて、前記左右2つの領域のうち太陽光Lが直接に照射されている部分の面積が大きい方に所定画像表示エリア720が配置されている場合には、前記上下の2つの領域の配置を入れ替えて、当該所定画像表示エリア720及び明暗画像表示エリア710の配置を前記上下の2つの領域と共に変更する。 When controlling the display device 900 in the present embodiment, steps S101 and S102 in FIG. 12 are performed as in the first embodiment. Subsequently, in step S103, the image output setting unit 532 determines, based on the obtained light reception information a1 to d1, that the area of the portion directly irradiated with sunlight L is larger in the two left and right regions. When the predetermined image display area 720 is arranged, the arrangement of the two upper and lower areas is switched, and the arrangement of the predetermined image display area 720 and the light and dark image display area 710 is changed together with the upper and lower two areas. .
 一方、画像出力設定部532は、得られた受光情報a1~d1に基づいて、前記左右2つの領域のうち太陽光Lが直接に照射されている部分の面積が小さい方に所定画像表示エリア720が配置されている場合には、前記各表示エリアの配置を入れ替えずに、そのままの配置とする。 On the other hand, the image output setting unit 532 determines the predetermined image display area 720 based on the obtained light reception information a1 to d1 so that the area of the portion directly irradiated with the sunlight L is smaller in the two left and right regions. Are arranged without changing the arrangement of the display areas.
 本実施形態では、図16におけるステップ104は行わず、前記各表示エリアにそのままの大きさで所定画像721又は明暗画像711を表示する。また、図16のステップS105と同様に、バックライト制御部501は、画像出力設定部532から受けた制御信号に基づいて、所定画像表示エリア720を含む表示領域90の上下何れかのエリアにおけるバックライト300の照射部302を制御し、その照射部302の輝度を高める。そのことによって、所定画像721をより視認しやすくすることができる。 In this embodiment, step 104 in FIG. 16 is not performed, and the predetermined image 721 or the light / dark image 711 is displayed in the display area as it is. Similarly to step S <b> 105 of FIG. 16, the backlight control unit 501 performs backlighting in any of the upper and lower areas of the display area 90 including the predetermined image display area 720 based on the control signal received from the image output setting unit 532. The irradiation unit 302 of the light 300 is controlled, and the luminance of the irradiation unit 302 is increased. As a result, the predetermined image 721 can be more visually recognized.
 尚、所定画像721及び明暗画像711の総数が3以上の複数である場合であっても、前記と同様に、太陽光Lが直接に照射されている部分の面積が小さい方に所定画像表示エリア720が表示されるように、表示領域90における前記上下2つの領域を適宜入れ替えればよい。 Even in the case where the total number of the predetermined images 721 and the light and dark images 711 is a plurality of three or more, the predetermined image display area is smaller in the area where the sunlight L is directly irradiated as described above. The upper and lower two areas in the display area 90 may be appropriately switched so that 720 is displayed.
 従って、本実施形態によると、基準値を上回る外部光が表示領域90に照射されたときに、画像表示制御部500によって所定画像表示エリア720及び明暗画像表示エリア710の配置を適宜、上下入れ替えて設定するようにしたので、画像表示制御部500による制御を簡単にして、画像表示を行うことができる。なお、本実施形態では、所定画像表示エリア720及び明暗画像表示エリア710の配置を上下入れ替えて設定したが、入れ替えの位置変更態様は特に限定されるものではなく、例えば上下の入れ替えのみならず左右の入れ替えでも、画像表示制御部500による制御を簡単にして適切な画像表示を行うことが可能である。 Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the display area 90 is irradiated with external light exceeding the reference value, the arrangement of the predetermined image display area 720 and the light / dark image display area 710 is appropriately changed upside down by the image display control unit 500. Since the setting is made, the control by the image display control unit 500 can be simplified and the image display can be performed. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the predetermined image display area 720 and the light / dark image display area 710 is set upside down, but the position change mode of the change is not particularly limited, and for example, not only the upside down but also the left and right Even in the replacement, it is possible to simplify the control by the image display control unit 500 and perform appropriate image display.
 《実施形態5》
 図24は、上述の実施形態2~4よりも強度が高い外部光としての太陽光Lが表示領域90に直接に照射されている実施形態5の表示装置900を示す平面図である。本実施形態5は、明暗画像表示エリア710と所定画像表示エリア720とを共に、強度が高い外部光の直接照射領域以外の比較的暗い領域に設定するようにしたものである。即ち、上述の実施形態2では、外部光の直接照射領域には明暗画像表示エリア710を設定し、比較的暗い領域には所定画像表示エリア720を設定したが、強度が高い外部光が表示領域90に照射されている場合は、その外部光の直接照射領域に明暗画像表示エリア710を設定すると、明暗画像711が見えにくくなる可能性がある。そこで、強度が高い外部光としての太陽光Lが表示領域90に直接に照射されている場合、暗画像表示エリア710と所定画像表示エリア720とを共に、強度が高い外部光の直接照射領域以外の比較的暗い領域に設定する。
<< Embodiment 5 >>
FIG. 24 is a plan view showing a display device 900 of Embodiment 5 in which sunlight L as external light having higher intensity than those of Embodiments 2 to 4 described above is directly applied to the display area 90. FIG. In the fifth embodiment, both the bright and dark image display area 710 and the predetermined image display area 720 are set in a relatively dark area other than the direct irradiation area of high intensity external light. That is, in the above-described second embodiment, the bright and dark image display area 710 is set in the direct irradiation area of external light, and the predetermined image display area 720 is set in the relatively dark area. However, high intensity external light is displayed in the display area. If the light / dark image display area 710 is set in the external light direct irradiation region, the light / dark image 711 may be difficult to see. Therefore, when the sunlight L as the external light having a high intensity is directly irradiated on the display area 90, both the dark image display area 710 and the predetermined image display area 720 are other than the direct irradiation area of the external light having a high intensity. Set to a relatively dark area.
 受光センサ180によって得られた受光情報に対し、実施形態2の基準値よりも高い高度基準値が予め定められている。そして、本実施形態における画像表示制御部500は、受光センサ180によって得られた受光情報a1~d1に基づいて、表示領域90のうち高度基準値を上回る受光情報a1~d1が得られた部位を除いた比較的暗い領域に、所定画像表示エリア720及び明暗画像表示エリア710の双方を設定するように構成されている。 An altitude reference value higher than the reference value of the second embodiment is determined in advance for the light reception information obtained by the light receiving sensor 180. Then, the image display control unit 500 according to the present embodiment selects a portion of the display area 90 where the light reception information a1 to d1 exceeding the altitude reference value is obtained based on the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the light reception sensor 180. Both the predetermined image display area 720 and the light / dark image display area 710 are set in the relatively dark area except for the above.
 ここで、画像表示制御部500は、例えば後述する画像の優先度又は表示内容等に基づいて、所定画像表示エリア720を明暗画像表示エリア710よりも大きく設定することも可能であるし、また、所定画像表示エリア720を明暗画像表示エリア710よりも小さく設定することも可能である。 Here, the image display control unit 500 can set the predetermined image display area 720 to be larger than the light and dark image display area 710 based on, for example, the priority or display content of an image to be described later, It is also possible to set the predetermined image display area 720 smaller than the light and dark image display area 710.
 本実施形態における表示装置900を制御する場合には、実施形態2と同様に、図16におけるステップS101及びS102を行う。続いて、ステップS103において、画像出力設定部532は、得られた受光情報a1~d1に基づいて、所定画像表示エリア720及び明暗画像表示エリア710を設定する。 When controlling the display device 900 in the present embodiment, steps S101 and S102 in FIG. 16 are performed as in the second embodiment. Subsequently, in step S103, the image output setting unit 532 sets a predetermined image display area 720 and a light / dark image display area 710 based on the obtained light reception information a1 to d1.
 このとき、画像出力設定部532は、前記太陽光Lが直接に照射されていない領域に例えば所定画像表示エリア720を比較的大きく配置すると共に、その所定画像表示エリア720の座標情報を画像解析により検出し、当該太陽光Lが照射されていない領域における所定画像表示エリア720以外の領域(つまり、空き領域)に、例えば明暗画像表示エリア710を設定する。そうして、所定画像721及び明暗画像711は、各々画像出力制御部534により拡大又は縮小されて、前記太陽光Lが直接に照射されていない領域に表示されることとなる。 At this time, the image output setting unit 532 arranges, for example, the predetermined image display area 720 relatively large in an area where the sunlight L is not directly irradiated, and the coordinate information of the predetermined image display area 720 is obtained by image analysis. For example, a bright and dark image display area 710 is set in an area other than the predetermined image display area 720 (that is, an empty area) in the area that is not irradiated with the sunlight L. Then, the predetermined image 721 and the bright / dark image 711 are enlarged or reduced by the image output control unit 534, respectively, and displayed in an area where the sunlight L is not directly irradiated.
 尚、所定画像721及び明暗画像711の総数が3以上の複数である場合、画像出力設定部532は、前記太陽光Lが照射されていない領域における例えば所定画像表示エリア720以外の領域に、複数の明暗画像表示エリア710を設定する。 When the total number of the predetermined images 721 and the light and dark images 711 is a plurality of three or more, the image output setting unit 532 includes a plurality of image output areas in areas other than the predetermined image display area 720 in the area where the sunlight L is not irradiated. The bright and dark image display area 710 is set.
 従って、本実施形態によると、基準値を上回るような強度の強い外部光が表示領域90に照射されたときに、画像表示制御部500によって所定画像721及び明暗画像711の双方を、太陽光Lが直接に照射されていない比較的暗い領域において表示するようにしたので、そのような強い外部光が表示領域90に照射された場合であっても、所定画像721による情報と明暗画像711による情報についても好適に観察者に伝達することができる。 Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the display area 90 is irradiated with strong external light that exceeds the reference value, the image display control unit 500 converts both the predetermined image 721 and the light / dark image 711 into sunlight L. Is displayed in a relatively dark area that is not directly irradiated, so even if such strong external light is irradiated on the display area 90, information by the predetermined image 721 and information by the light and dark image 711 Can be suitably transmitted to the observer.
 《実施形態6》
 上述の実施形態5では、強度が高い外部光としての太陽光Lが表示領域90に直接に照射されている場合、暗画像表示エリア710と所定画像表示エリア720とを共に、強度が高い外部光の直接照射領域以外の比較的暗い領域に設定した。しかし、本発明の範囲はこのような実施形態に限定されない。
Embodiment 6
In the above-described fifth embodiment, when the sunlight L as external light having high intensity is directly applied to the display area 90, both the dark image display area 710 and the predetermined image display area 720 have high external light. A relatively dark area other than the direct irradiation area was set. However, the scope of the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment.
 例えば、高い強度の外部光が表示領域90の広い範囲に亘って照射され、かつ、その部分の面積が大きい場合、仮に、暗画像表示エリア710と所定画像表示エリア720とを共に、強度が高い外部光の直接照射領域以外の比較的暗い領域に設定したとしても、暗画画像711及び所定画像721の画像のサイズは小さいものとなってしまう。そこで、本実施形態6においては、強度が高い外部光としての太陽光Lが表示領域90に直接に照射され、その面積が表示領域90の面積に対して一定の割合を上回った場合、表示領域90に画像を表示することを一時的に停止させる。これにより、小さく表示することによる宣伝・識別機能が十分ではない画像を表示しないことで表示装置の駆動用電源の消費を節約させることができ、また、小さくて見づらい画像を観察者に見せることによる観察者のストレスの発生を防止することができる。 For example, when high intensity external light is irradiated over a wide range of the display area 90 and the area of the portion is large, both the dark image display area 710 and the predetermined image display area 720 have high intensity. Even if a relatively dark area other than the direct irradiation area of the external light is set, the sizes of the dark image 711 and the predetermined image 721 are small. Accordingly, in the sixth embodiment, when the display area 90 is directly irradiated with sunlight L as external light having high intensity, and the area exceeds a certain ratio with respect to the area of the display area 90, the display area The display of an image at 90 is temporarily stopped. As a result, it is possible to save power consumption for driving the display device by not displaying an image whose advertisement / identification function is not sufficient by displaying it in a small size, and by showing a small and hard-to-see image to the observer The occurrence of stress on the observer can be prevented.
 この場合、画像表示制御部500は、例えば電源522と接続されているとよい。そして、高度基準値を上回る受光情報1a~1dが得られた部位の面積が、表示領域90の面積に対して一定の割合を上回った場合に、画像表示制御部500は動作停止信号を作成する。画像表示制御部500から動作停止信号が送られると、電源522は液晶パネル制御部520やバックライト制御部501等への電力の供給を停止する。これによって、画像表示制御部500は、高度基準値を上回る受光情報1a~1dが得られた部位の面積が、表示領域90の面積に対して一定の割合を上回った場合に、表示領域90に画像を表示することを停止させることができる。 In this case, the image display control unit 500 may be connected to the power source 522, for example. Then, when the area of the part where the received light information 1a to 1d exceeding the altitude reference value exceeds a certain ratio with respect to the area of the display region 90, the image display control unit 500 generates an operation stop signal. . When an operation stop signal is sent from the image display control unit 500, the power source 522 stops supplying power to the liquid crystal panel control unit 520, the backlight control unit 501, and the like. As a result, the image display control unit 500 causes the display region 90 to be displayed when the area of the part where the received light information 1a to 1d exceeding the altitude reference value exceeds a certain ratio with respect to the area of the display region 90. The display of the image can be stopped.
 また、他の形態として、画像表示制御部500は、表示領域90における画面中央部分において、予め定められた高度基準値を上回る強度の外部光の受光情報1a~1dが得られた場合に、表示領域90に画像を表示することを一時的に停止させることも可能である。表示領域90の中心部は観察者の視界に入りやすいので、表示領域90の中心部が見難くなると、表示画像全体の内容を把握するのが困難になりやすい。そこで、画像表示制御部500は、表示領域90の中心部が見難くなった際に、表示領域90に画像を表示するのを停止させることができる。これによって、見難い画像を表示することによって、観察者にストレスを生じさせることをなくすと共に、表示装置の駆動用電源を節約させることができる。 As another form, the image display control unit 500 displays the light receiving information 1a to 1d of external light having an intensity exceeding a predetermined altitude reference value at the center of the screen in the display area 90. It is also possible to temporarily stop displaying an image in the area 90. Since the central portion of the display area 90 is easy to enter the observer's field of view, if the central portion of the display area 90 is difficult to see, it is difficult to grasp the contents of the entire display image. Therefore, the image display control unit 500 can stop displaying an image on the display area 90 when it becomes difficult to see the center of the display area 90. Thus, by displaying an image that is difficult to see, it is possible to eliminate stress on the observer and to save power for driving the display device.
 《実施形態7》
 図25~図32は、受光センサの配置の変形例を模式的に示す表示装置のブロック図である。受光センサ180は、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200に照射された外部光を表示領域90の複数の位置で受光することができるように配置されていればよい。以下、受光センサ180の配置位置を例示する。
<< Embodiment 7 >>
FIGS. 25 to 32 are block diagrams of display devices that schematically show modifications of the arrangement of the light receiving sensors. The light receiving sensor 180 may be arranged so that external light irradiated on the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 can be received at a plurality of positions in the display region 90. Hereinafter, the arrangement position of the light receiving sensor 180 will be exemplified.
 受光センサ180は、例えば、表示領域90を横断又は縦断するように設定された線に沿って分散して配置してもよい。これによって、表示領域90を横断又は縦断するように設定された線に沿って、表示領域90に照射された外部光の受光情報を取得することができる。この場合、例えば、表示領域90を横断又は縦断するように設定された線に沿って、外部光の明るさを検知できる。この場合、複数の画素からなる1つの画素群毎に受光センサ180を配置する場合に比べて、受光センサ180の数を減らすことができる。 The light receiving sensors 180 may be arranged in a distributed manner, for example, along a line set so as to traverse or longitudinally cross the display area 90. Thereby, the light reception information of the external light irradiated on the display area 90 can be acquired along a line set so as to traverse or cross the display area 90. In this case, for example, the brightness of the external light can be detected along a line set so as to cross or vertically cross the display area 90. In this case, the number of light receiving sensors 180 can be reduced as compared with the case where the light receiving sensors 180 are arranged for each pixel group composed of a plurality of pixels.
 そのことにより、外部光の受光情報を取得するための回路や配線を簡素化でき、製造コストを低く抑えることができる。また、受光センサ180を配置した表示画素80では開口率が低下してしまうが、このように受光センサ180の数を低減することにより、表示領域90の全体として表示画素80の開口率の低下を抑えることができるため、表示画像の輝度低下を抑制できることとなる。 This makes it possible to simplify the circuit and wiring for acquiring external light reception information and to keep the manufacturing cost low. In addition, although the aperture ratio decreases in the display pixel 80 in which the light receiving sensor 180 is disposed, the aperture ratio of the display pixel 80 is reduced as a whole in the display area 90 by reducing the number of the light receiving sensors 180 in this way. Since it can suppress, the luminance fall of a display image can be suppressed.
 例えば、表示領域90が矩形状である場合、図25及び図26に示すように、受光センサ180は、表示領域90の四辺のうち少なくとも対向した二辺の各中点を結ぶ線に沿って表示領域90に配置してもよい。この場合、受光センサ180は、当該中間点を結ぶ線に沿って、表示領域90を照射する外部光の受光情報a1~d1を得ることができる。 For example, when the display area 90 is rectangular, the light receiving sensor 180 displays along the line connecting the midpoints of at least two opposite sides of the four sides of the display area 90 as shown in FIGS. You may arrange | position to the area | region 90. In this case, the light receiving sensor 180 can obtain the light receiving information a1 to d1 of the external light that irradiates the display area 90 along the line connecting the intermediate points.
 また、図25に示すように、矩形状の表示領域90の短手方向における二辺の各中点を結ぶ線に沿って受光センサ180を配置してもよい。この場合、矩形の表示領域90の長手方向における外部光の受光情報a1~d1を得ることができるので、表示領域90全体を照射する外部光の輝度分布を大まかに反映した受光情報a1~d1を得ることができる。 Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the light receiving sensor 180 may be arranged along a line connecting the midpoints of the two sides in the short direction of the rectangular display area 90. In this case, since the light reception information a1 to d1 of the external light in the longitudinal direction of the rectangular display area 90 can be obtained, the light reception information a1 to d1 roughly reflecting the luminance distribution of the external light that irradiates the entire display area 90 is obtained. Obtainable.
 表示領域90の短手方向における外部光の受光情報a1~d1を正確に取得したい場合には、図26に示すように、表示領域90の短手方向における二辺の各中点を結ぶ線に沿って受光センサ180を配置するとともに、表示領域90の長手方向における二辺の各中点を結ぶ線に沿って受光センサ180を配置してもよい。 When it is desired to accurately obtain the light reception information a1 to d1 of the external light in the short direction of the display area 90, as shown in FIG. 26, the line connecting the midpoints of the two sides in the short direction of the display area 90 The light receiving sensor 180 may be disposed along the line connecting the midpoints of the two sides in the longitudinal direction of the display region 90.
 また、図27及び図28に示すように、表示領域90の周縁部において、表示領域90の四辺のうち少なくとも対向した二辺に沿って、受光センサ180を配置してもよい。 27 and 28, the light receiving sensor 180 may be arranged along at least two opposite sides of the four sides of the display region 90 in the peripheral portion of the display region 90.
 ここで、表示領域90の中心部に受光センサ180を配置し、表示領域90の中心部で表示画像の輝度が低下すると、かかる表示画像の輝度低下がユーザに認知され易い。これに対し、上述のように、表示領域90の周縁部に受光センサ180を配置することにより、表示領域90の中心部に受光センサ180を配置した場合と比べて、表示画像の輝度低下がユーザに認知されにくくなる。 Here, when the light receiving sensor 180 is arranged at the center of the display area 90 and the brightness of the display image is lowered at the center of the display area 90, the brightness of the display image is easily recognized by the user. On the other hand, as described above, disposing the light receiving sensor 180 at the peripheral portion of the display area 90 reduces the brightness of the display image compared to the case where the light receiving sensor 180 is disposed at the center of the display area 90. It becomes difficult to be recognized.
 なお、受光センサ180は、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の平面視において、他の位置に配置することができる。例えば、図29に示すように、表示領域90の少なくとも一方の対角線に沿って受光センサ180が配置されていてもよい。また、受光センサ180は、図30に示すように、表示領域90の周縁部における各辺の中央部に配置してもよい。また、受光センサ180は、図31に示すように、表示領域90の周縁部の四隅に配置してもよい。 It should be noted that the light receiving sensor 180 can be disposed at another position in the plan view of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200. For example, as shown in FIG. 29, the light receiving sensor 180 may be arranged along at least one diagonal line of the display region 90. Further, as shown in FIG. 30, the light receiving sensor 180 may be disposed at the center of each side in the peripheral portion of the display area 90. Further, the light receiving sensors 180 may be arranged at the four corners of the peripheral portion of the display area 90 as shown in FIG.
 また、上述の実施形態では、表示領域90には、A、B、C、Dの四つに分割されたエリアが設定されている。しかし、表示領域90の分割数は、4つに限定されず、用途に合わせて適宜変更することができる。例えば、図32に示すように、受光センサ180が配置された位置に対応させて、表示領域90を分割した複数のエリアA~Zを設定してもよい。この場合、各エリアA~Z(各受光センサ180)の位置に対応させて、照射部302を配置させ、照射部302を各々制御するとよい。この場合、バックライト制御部501は、受光センサ180によって得られた受光情報a1~z1に基づいて、照射部302毎に設定されたエリアA~Z毎に照射部302を各々制御することができる。 In the above-described embodiment, the display area 90 is set with areas divided into four areas A, B, C, and D. However, the number of divisions of the display area 90 is not limited to four and can be changed as appropriate according to the application. For example, as shown in FIG. 32, a plurality of areas A to Z obtained by dividing the display area 90 may be set corresponding to the position where the light receiving sensor 180 is disposed. In this case, it is preferable that the irradiation unit 302 is arranged corresponding to the position of each of the areas A to Z (each light receiving sensor 180), and each of the irradiation units 302 is controlled. In this case, the backlight control unit 501 can control the irradiation unit 302 for each of the areas A to Z set for each irradiation unit 302 based on the light reception information a1 to z1 obtained by the light receiving sensor 180. .
 表示画素80には、バックライト300から光散乱性液晶表示パネル200及び液晶表示パネル100に照射される照明光と表示領域90を照射する外部光とを透過させる開口部が設けられている。この場合、ブラックマトリクス62は、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の平面視において隣り合った開口部の間の領域に沿って格子状に形成されており、照明光及び外部光を各々遮断している。 The display pixel 80 is provided with an opening for transmitting illumination light irradiated from the backlight 300 to the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 and the liquid crystal display panel 100 and external light irradiating the display region 90. In this case, the black matrix 62 is formed in a lattice shape along a region between adjacent openings in a plan view of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200, and blocks illumination light and external light, respectively. .
 そこで、受光センサ180は、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の内部に配置されていることがよく、例えば、受光センサ180は、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の平面視におけるブラックマトリクス62が形成された領域において、ブラックマトリクス62よりも光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の前面側に配置されているとよい。この場合、表示画素80の開口部を覆わずに、受光センサ180を表示画素80が形成された領域内に配置することができる。これによって、表示画素80の開口率低下を抑制できる。 Therefore, the light receiving sensor 180 is preferably arranged inside the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200. For example, the light receiving sensor 180 is formed with the black matrix 62 in a plan view of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200. In the region, it is preferable that the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 is disposed on the front side of the black matrix 62. In this case, the light receiving sensor 180 can be disposed in the region where the display pixel 80 is formed without covering the opening of the display pixel 80. Thereby, a decrease in the aperture ratio of the display pixel 80 can be suppressed.
 光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の平面視におけるブラックマトリクス62が形成された領域に受光センサ180を配置した場合の具体例を以下に示す。 A specific example in the case where the light receiving sensor 180 is arranged in a region where the black matrix 62 in the plan view of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 is formed is shown below.
 例えば、受光センサ180は、図33に示すように、バックライト300側においてブラックマトリクス62により覆われるように配置されるとよい。これによって、バックライト300から照射される照明光は、受光センサ180に受光される前にブラックマトリクス62によって遮光されるので、照明光が排除された受光情報a1~d1を受光センサ180によって得ることができる。 For example, as shown in FIG. 33, the light receiving sensor 180 may be disposed so as to be covered with the black matrix 62 on the backlight 300 side. As a result, the illumination light emitted from the backlight 300 is shielded by the black matrix 62 before being received by the light receiving sensor 180, so that the light receiving sensor 180 can obtain the received light information a1 to d1 from which the illumination light is excluded. Can do.
 また、図34に示すように、受光センサ180は、ブラックマトリクス62の中に配置されていてもよい。 Further, as shown in FIG. 34, the light receiving sensor 180 may be arranged in the black matrix 62.
 また、受光センサ180は、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の平面視においてTFT24や信号線21が形成された領域に配置されていてもよい。TFT24や信号線21は遮光性を有するため、バックライト300からの照明光は、TFT24や信号線21によって遮光される。TFT24や信号線21が形成された領域に配置された受光センサ180は、照明光が元々遮光されている領域に配置されているので、表示画素80の開口率を低下させない。これによって、受光センサ180が配置されることによって、表示画像の輝度が低下するのを防止できる。 Further, the light receiving sensor 180 may be arranged in a region where the TFT 24 and the signal line 21 are formed in a plan view of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200. Since the TFT 24 and the signal line 21 have a light shielding property, the illumination light from the backlight 300 is shielded by the TFT 24 and the signal line 21. Since the light receiving sensor 180 disposed in the region where the TFT 24 and the signal line 21 are formed is disposed in the region where the illumination light is originally shielded, the aperture ratio of the display pixel 80 is not reduced. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the luminance of the display image from being lowered by the light receiving sensor 180 being arranged.
 また、受光センサ180は、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200以外の部材にも配置してもよい。 Further, the light receiving sensor 180 may be disposed on a member other than the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200.
 例えば、バックライトを概略的に示す一部拡大平面図である図35に示すように、受光センサ180は、バックライト300に配置されていてもよい。この場合、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の表示画素80に形成された開口部を覆わずに、受光センサ180を表示領域90に配置できるので、表示画素80の開口率低下を防止できる。 For example, as shown in FIG. 35 which is a partially enlarged plan view schematically showing the backlight, the light receiving sensor 180 may be arranged in the backlight 300. In this case, since the light receiving sensor 180 can be arranged in the display area 90 without covering the opening formed in the display pixel 80 of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200, a decrease in the aperture ratio of the display pixel 80 can be prevented.
 また、受光センサ180は、液晶表示パネル100の内部に配置されていることも可能であり、これにより光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の開口率低下を抑制することができる。 Further, the light receiving sensor 180 can be disposed inside the liquid crystal display panel 100, thereby suppressing a decrease in the aperture ratio of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200.
 また、受光センサ180は、液晶表示パネル100とバックライト300との間に配置されていてもよい。この場合、受光センサ180が光散乱性液晶表示パネル200や液晶表示パネル100やバックライト300に直接設けられないため、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200や液晶表示パネル100やバックライト300の構造を変えずに、受光センサ180を設けることができる。受光センサ180は、例えば、液晶表示パネル100とバックライト300との間に挟み込まれた受光センサ支持部材に配置することが可能である。受光センサ支持部材は、光透過性を有した透明基板が好ましく、液晶表示パネル100とバックライト300との間に挟み込まれている光学シートを利用することもできる。このような受光センサ支持部材を用いると、液晶表示パネル100や光散乱性液晶表示パネル200やバックライト300では配置できなかった部位に受光センサ180を配置できる。このため、受光センサのレイアウトの自由度を向上させることができる。また、受光センサ180を受光センサ支持部材に配置する場合、受光センサ180の配置パターンが異なった複数の受光センサ支持部材を設けることができる。そのことにより、複数の受光センサ支持部材のいずれかを取り替えるだけで、受光センサ180の配置を変更することができる。このため、表示装置900の用途(テレビ放送受信機用、インフォメーションディスプレイ用など)に応じて、容易に受光センサ180の位置を変更できる。 Further, the light receiving sensor 180 may be disposed between the liquid crystal display panel 100 and the backlight 300. In this case, since the light receiving sensor 180 is not directly provided on the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200, the liquid crystal display panel 100, or the backlight 300, the structure of the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200, the liquid crystal display panel 100, or the backlight 300 is changed. In addition, the light receiving sensor 180 can be provided. The light receiving sensor 180 can be disposed, for example, on a light receiving sensor support member that is sandwiched between the liquid crystal display panel 100 and the backlight 300. The light receiving sensor support member is preferably a transparent substrate having optical transparency, and an optical sheet sandwiched between the liquid crystal display panel 100 and the backlight 300 can also be used. When such a light receiving sensor support member is used, the light receiving sensor 180 can be disposed at a portion that cannot be disposed on the liquid crystal display panel 100, the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200, or the backlight 300. For this reason, the freedom degree of the layout of a light receiving sensor can be improved. When the light receiving sensor 180 is arranged on the light receiving sensor support member, a plurality of light receiving sensor support members having different arrangement patterns of the light receiving sensors 180 can be provided. Accordingly, the arrangement of the light receiving sensors 180 can be changed by simply replacing any of the plurality of light receiving sensor support members. Therefore, the position of the light receiving sensor 180 can be easily changed according to the use of the display device 900 (for a television broadcast receiver, for an information display, etc.).
 《実施形態8》
 上述の実施形態2~7においては、受光センサを設け、表示領域に照射された外部光の強度に応じて、所定画像表示エリアと明暗画像表示エリアとを設定した。しかし、本発明の範囲はこのような実施形態に限定されることはない。本実施形態8においては、表示画像の優先度を示す優先情報423に基づいて、所定画像表示エリアと明暗画像表示エリアとを設定する。
Embodiment 8
In the above-described Embodiments 2 to 7, the light receiving sensor is provided, and the predetermined image display area and the light / dark image display area are set according to the intensity of the external light applied to the display area. However, the scope of the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. In the eighth embodiment, a predetermined image display area and a light / dark image display area are set based on priority information 423 indicating the priority of a display image.
 上述の図13を参照して説明するに、外部処理装置421は複数の画像をデータとして有しており、各画像の優先情報423を含むデジタル信号424を制御部550に供給する。制御部550は、外部処理装置421から入力された優先情報423を含むデジタル信号に基づいて、液晶表示パネル100、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200及びバックライト300を制御する。画像表示制御部500は、表示画像の優先度を示す優先情報に基づいて、明暗画像表示エリアと所定画像表示エリアとを設定して表示領域90に表示する。 As described with reference to FIG. 13 described above, the external processing device 421 has a plurality of images as data, and supplies a digital signal 424 including priority information 423 of each image to the control unit 550. The control unit 550 controls the liquid crystal display panel 100, the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200, and the backlight 300 based on a digital signal including priority information 423 input from the external processing device 421. The image display control unit 500 sets a bright and dark image display area and a predetermined image display area based on the priority information indicating the priority of the display image, and displays it in the display area 90.
 各表示画像の優先情報は、特に限定されるものではないが、観察者に対する情報の必要性・重要性、表示の見やすさ、情報の新規度等を適宜考慮して設定することが可能である。例えば表示装置900が駅構内に設置された場合にあっては、観察者は電車の到着時刻を優先的に留意するため、時刻表示画像としての明暗画像711の優先情報は、ニューステロップとしての所定画像721よりも高く設定される。図36は、画像の優先情報を考慮して、表示領域に明暗画像と所定画像とを表示した一具体例を示す図である。時刻表示画像としての明暗画像711の優先情報は、ニューステロップとしての所定画像721よりも高く設定されているため、図36に示すように、明暗画像711は所定画像721よりも大きく設定される。画像の表示面積は優先情報の優先度に対応させて設定することが望ましい。そして優先度が高い画像を優先度が低い画像よりも大きく表示する割合は、特に限定されるものではなく各画像の優先度を考慮して適宜設定することが可能である。 The priority information of each display image is not particularly limited, but can be set by appropriately considering the necessity / importance of information for the observer, the visibility of display, the novelty of information, and the like. . For example, when the display device 900 is installed in a station premises, the observer pays attention to the arrival time of the train with priority, so the priority information of the light-dark image 711 as the time display image is predetermined as a news telop. It is set higher than the image 721. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a specific example in which a bright and dark image and a predetermined image are displayed in the display area in consideration of image priority information. Since the priority information of the light and dark image 711 as the time display image is set higher than the predetermined image 721 as the news telop, the light and dark image 711 is set larger than the predetermined image 721 as shown in FIG. It is desirable to set the image display area in correspondence with the priority of the priority information. The ratio of displaying an image with a higher priority than an image with a lower priority is not particularly limited, and can be set as appropriate in consideration of the priority of each image.
 また、各画像の優先情報は、時刻に依存して変更されるものとすることも可能である。例えば、上述した具体例のように、表示装置900が駅構内に設置された場合にあっては、朝の時間帯(例えば午前7時~午前9時)では、通勤通学時であるため観察者は電車の到着時刻を優先的に留意するが、昼の時間帯(例えば午前11時~午後3時)では、買い物や散策等であるため観察者は電車の到着時刻よりもニュースを優先的に留意する。そこで、例えば、朝の時間帯では、時刻表示画像としての明暗画像711の優先情報は、ニューステロップとしての所定画像721の優先情報よりも高く設定し、一方、昼の時間帯では、ニューステロップとしての所定画像721の優先情報は、時刻表示画像としての明暗画像711の優先情報よりも高く設定することも可能である。 Also, the priority information of each image can be changed depending on the time. For example, in the case where the display device 900 is installed in a station yard as in the above-described specific example, the observer is in the morning time zone (for example, 7:00 am to 9:00 am) because it is commuting to school. Gives priority to the arrival time of trains, but in the daytime hours (for example, from 11:00 am to 3:00 pm), it is used for shopping and walking, so the observer gives priority to the news over the arrival time of the train. pay attention to. Therefore, for example, in the morning time zone, the priority information of the light and dark image 711 as the time display image is set higher than the priority information of the predetermined image 721 as the news telop, while in the daytime time zone, the priority information is set as the news telop. The priority information of the predetermined image 721 can be set higher than the priority information of the light and dark image 711 as the time display image.
 図37は、異なる時間帯において画像の優先情報が変更された場合において、明暗画像と所定画像とを表示した一具体例を示す図である。図37に示すように、図36と異なり、例えば昼の時間帯では、ニューステロップとしての所定画像721は、時刻表示画像としての明暗画像711よりも優先情報が高いため、所定画像721は明暗画像711よりも大きく表示される。なお、所定画像721が明暗画像711よりも大きく表示される場合、所定画像721を図37に示すように二段表示のように複数段表示とすることも可能である。 FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a specific example in which a bright and dark image and a predetermined image are displayed when priority information of an image is changed in different time zones. As shown in FIG. 37, unlike FIG. 36, for example, in the daytime period, the predetermined image 721 as a news telop has higher priority information than the light and dark image 711 as a time display image. It is displayed larger than 711. When the predetermined image 721 is displayed larger than the light and dark image 711, the predetermined image 721 can be displayed in a plurality of stages such as a two-stage display as shown in FIG.
 《実施形態9》
 上述の実施形態8においては、表示画像の優先度を示す優先情報に基づいて、所定画像表示エリアと明暗画像表示エリアとを設定した。しかし、本発明の範囲はこのような実施形態に限定されることはない。本実施形態9においては、表示画像の表示内容を示す画像情報422に基づいて、所定画像表示エリアと明暗画像表示エリアとを設定する。
Embodiment 9
In the above-described eighth embodiment, the predetermined image display area and the light / dark image display area are set based on the priority information indicating the priority of the display image. However, the scope of the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. In the ninth embodiment, a predetermined image display area and a light / dark image display area are set based on image information 422 indicating the display content of the display image.
 上述の図13を参照して説明するに、外部処理装置421は複数の画像をデータとして有しており、各画像の画像情報422を含むデジタル信号424を制御部550に供給する。制御部550は、外部処理装置421から入力された画像情報422を含むデジタル信号に基づいて、液晶表示パネル100、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200及びバックライト300を制御する。画像表示制御部500は、表示画像の表示内容を示す画像情報422に基づいて、明暗画像表示エリアと所定画像表示エリアとを設定して表示領域90に表示する。 As described with reference to FIG. 13 described above, the external processing device 421 has a plurality of images as data, and supplies a digital signal 424 including image information 422 of each image to the control unit 550. The control unit 550 controls the liquid crystal display panel 100, the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200, and the backlight 300 based on a digital signal including image information 422 input from the external processing device 421. The image display control unit 500 sets a bright and dark image display area and a predetermined image display area based on the image information 422 indicating the display content of the display image, and displays it in the display area 90.
 画像情報422は、特に限定されるものではないが、例えば表示される画像自体の形状又は色彩に基づく表示の見やすさ、情報の新規度等を適宜考慮して設定することが可能である。情報の表示の見やすさを考慮すれば、例えばニューステロップは、各文字が画面に表示される時間を比較的長く設定する必要があるため、一文字あたりの大きさは比較的小さいことが好ましい。また、例えば明日の天気を示す天気マークは図柄の大きさが小さいと他の天気マークとの識別が難しいため、比較的大きく設定することが好ましい。図38は、表示画像の表示内容を考慮して、表示領域に明暗画像と所定画像とを表示した一具体例を示す図である。図38に示すように、天気マークとしての明暗画像711は比較的大きく設定され、ニューステロップとしての所定画像721は比較的小さく設定される。 The image information 422 is not particularly limited, but can be set by appropriately considering, for example, the visibility of the display based on the shape or color of the displayed image itself, the novelty of the information, and the like. Considering the ease of viewing information display, for example, the news telop needs to set a relatively long time for each character to be displayed on the screen, so that the size per character is preferably relatively small. In addition, for example, a weather mark indicating tomorrow's weather is preferably set relatively large because it is difficult to distinguish it from other weather marks if the size of the symbol is small. FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating a specific example in which a bright and dark image and a predetermined image are displayed in the display area in consideration of the display content of the display image. As shown in FIG. 38, the light and dark image 711 as a weather mark is set to be relatively large, and the predetermined image 721 as a news telop is set to be relatively small.
 なお、図38に示された表示態様と異なり、情報の新規度を考慮すれば、例えば、ニューステロップとしての所定画像721は新規情報である場合、比較的大きく設定することが好ましく、天気マークとしての明暗画像711は既に繰り返された情報である場合、比較的小さく設定することが好ましい。 Note that, unlike the display mode shown in FIG. 38, considering the degree of novelty of information, for example, when the predetermined image 721 as a news telop is new information, it is preferable to set it relatively large as a weather mark. If the bright and dark image 711 is information that has already been repeated, it is preferable to set the light and dark image 711 to be relatively small.
 《実施形態10》
 上述の実施形態1では、明暗画像表示エリア710に対応するバックライト300の照射部302を消灯させて明色表示及び暗色表示の組み合わせから成る画像を光散乱性液晶表示パネル200上に表示した。しかし、本発明はこのような実施形態に限定されることはない。
<< Embodiment 10 >>
In the first embodiment described above, the illumination unit 302 of the backlight 300 corresponding to the light / dark image display area 710 is turned off, and an image composed of a combination of bright color display and dark color display is displayed on the light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment.
 実施形態10では、明暗画像表示エリア710に対応するバックライト300の照射部302を消灯させるのではなく、全体を一律に低消費電力状態で薄暗く点灯させる。斯かる場合においても、明暗画像表示エリア710にて消費電力を省力化させながらコンテンツ表示を行うことができる。 In the tenth embodiment, the entire illumination unit 302 of the backlight 300 corresponding to the light / dark image display area 710 is not turned off, but the whole is turned on dimly in a low power consumption state. Even in such a case, content display can be performed while saving power consumption in the light and dark image display area 710.
 また、明暗画像表示エリア710に対応するバックライト300の照射部302のうち、一部を点灯させて他の一部を消灯させることも可能である。図39は、明暗画像表示エリア710において、暗色表示が形成される箇所に対応する照射部302を消灯させ、明色表示が形成される箇所に対応する照射部302は点灯させる表示形態を説明する図である。ここでは、図4に示した3つの透明基板にて表示装置900を構成する場合を例示して説明する。図39に示すように、バックライト制御部501は、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200上における暗色表示(例えば黒色表示B)が形成される箇所に対応するバックライト300の照射部302は消灯状態とし、一方、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200上における明色表示(例えば白色表示W)が形成される箇所に対応するバックライト300の照射部302は点灯状態とする。画像表示制御部500は、液晶表示パネル100の液晶層26を光透過状態にしておく。 It is also possible to turn on a part of the irradiation unit 302 of the backlight 300 corresponding to the light and dark image display area 710 and turn off the other part. FIG. 39 illustrates a display mode in which the irradiation unit 302 corresponding to the portion where the dark color display is formed is turned off and the irradiation unit 302 corresponding to the portion where the bright color display is formed is turned on in the light / dark image display area 710. FIG. Here, a case where the display device 900 is configured with the three transparent substrates illustrated in FIG. 4 will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 39, the backlight control unit 501 turns off the irradiation unit 302 of the backlight 300 corresponding to the place where the dark color display (for example, black display B) is formed on the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200. On the other hand, the irradiation unit 302 of the backlight 300 corresponding to a place where a bright color display (for example, white display W) is formed on the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 is turned on. The image display control unit 500 keeps the liquid crystal layer 26 of the liquid crystal display panel 100 in a light transmission state.
 これにより、明色表示が形成される箇所に対応するバックライト300の照射部302を点灯状態とすることにより、バックライト300の光はランダム状態の液晶分子38にて散乱されて散乱光を生じ、これにより明色表示を補うことで明色表示と暗色表示とのコントラストを強調させることができる。 Thereby, by turning on the irradiation unit 302 of the backlight 300 corresponding to the place where the bright color display is formed, the light of the backlight 300 is scattered by the liquid crystal molecules 38 in the random state, and scattered light is generated. As a result, the contrast between the light color display and the dark color display can be enhanced by supplementing the light color display.
 《実施形態11》
 図40は、本実施形態11における表示装置900の配線構造及び制御部を模式的に示すブロック図である。図41は、バックライトの間欠駆動を示すタイミングチャートである。
<< Embodiment 11 >>
FIG. 40 is a block diagram schematically illustrating a wiring structure and a control unit of the display device 900 according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 41 is a timing chart showing intermittent driving of the backlight.
 本実施形態11の表示装置900は、バックライト300を間欠駆動するようにしたものである。表示装置900は、表示領域90に表示される画像が切り替わる期間中にバックライト300を消灯させる消灯期間が存在するように、消灯期間とバックライト300を点灯する点灯期間とを交互に切り替える間欠駆動制御部540を備えている。 The display device 900 according to the eleventh embodiment is configured such that the backlight 300 is intermittently driven. The display device 900 is intermittently driven so as to alternately switch the light-off period and the light-on period during which the backlight 300 is lit so that there is a light-out period during which the backlight 300 is turned off during the period when the image displayed in the display area 90 is switched. A control unit 540 is provided.
 間欠駆動制御部540は、図40に示すように、制御部550の一部として設けられている。間欠駆動制御部540には、液晶パネル制御部520から液晶パネル制御信号が入力される。間欠駆動制御部540は、液晶パネル制御信号から表示画像が切り替わる画像切替期間を検出し、当該画像切替期間に基づいて消灯信号を作成し、電力投入部242に送る。 The intermittent drive control unit 540 is provided as a part of the control unit 550 as shown in FIG. A liquid crystal panel control signal is input from the liquid crystal panel control unit 520 to the intermittent drive control unit 540. The intermittent drive control unit 540 detects an image switching period in which the display image is switched from the liquid crystal panel control signal, creates a turn-off signal based on the image switching period, and sends it to the power input unit 242.
 電力投入部242は、消灯信号に基づいて、前記画像切替期間(1フレーム)中の所定期間において、照射部302への電力の投入を停止する。これによって、バックライト300の照射部302は、図41に示すように、1フレーム中に消灯期間が存在するように制御される。 The power input unit 242 stops the power supply to the irradiation unit 302 during a predetermined period in the image switching period (one frame) based on the turn-off signal. As a result, the irradiation unit 302 of the backlight 300 is controlled so that there is an extinguishing period in one frame, as shown in FIG.
 そして、画像表示制御部500は、バックライト300の消灯期間に受光センサ180によって得られた受光情報a1~d1に基づいて所定画像表示エリア720等を設定するように制御するとよい。このとき、図41に示すように、画像表示制御部500には、受光センサ180によって得られた受光情報a1~d1を採用する採用期間tが予め定められている。BLはバックライトの点灯を示す。DCは1フレーム(1F)における画像の切り替わりを示す。この採用期間tは、バックライト300の消灯期間と同じ期間になるように定められている。 Then, the image display control unit 500 may control to set the predetermined image display area 720 and the like based on the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the light reception sensor 180 during the extinguishing period of the backlight 300. At this time, as shown in FIG. 41, the image display control unit 500 has a predetermined adoption period t in which the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the light reception sensor 180 is employed. BL indicates lighting of the backlight. DC indicates switching of images in one frame (1F). This adoption period t is determined to be the same as the turn-off period of the backlight 300.
 このようにして得られたバックライト300の消灯期間における受光情報a1~d1には、バックライト300から照射される照明光が含まれてない。画像表示制御部500の画像出力設定部532は、照明光が含まれていない受光情報に基づいて、表示領域90を照射する外部光を正確に反映して明暗画像表示エリア710及び所定画像表示エリア720を設定することができる。 The received light information a1 to d1 during the extinguishing period of the backlight 300 thus obtained does not include illumination light emitted from the backlight 300. The image output setting unit 532 of the image display control unit 500 accurately reflects the external light that irradiates the display area 90 based on the light reception information that does not include illumination light, and the light and dark image display area 710 and the predetermined image display area. 720 can be set.
 また、画像表示制御部500は、点灯期間に受光センサ180によって得られた受光情報a1~d1に加えて、点灯期間に受光センサ180によって得られた受光情報a1~d1と、消灯期間に受光センサ180によって得られた受光情報a1~d1との差分に基づいて所定画像表示エリア720等を設定するとよい。 In addition to the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the light reception sensor 180 during the lighting period, the image display control unit 500 receives the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the light reception sensor 180 during the lighting period and the light reception sensor during the extinction period. The predetermined image display area 720 or the like may be set based on the difference from the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by 180.
 この場合、画像表示制御部500は、点灯期間に得られた受光情報a1~d1と、消灯期間に得られた受光情報a1~d1との差分を求めることによって照明光の受光情報a1~d1を算出する。そして、画像表示制御部500は、算出された照明光の受光情報a1~d1と、受光センサ180によって得られた受光情報a1~d1とに基づいて所定画像表示エリア720等を設定する。これによって、現在の照明光の明るさを反映して、適切に所定画像表示エリア720を設定できる。従って、周囲の温度変化や経年劣化などに伴って、照射部302から生じる照明光の明るさが変化しても、所定画像721等の表示を適切に制御することができる。 In this case, the image display control unit 500 obtains the light reception information a1 to d1 of the illumination light by obtaining the difference between the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained during the lighting period and the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained during the extinguishing period. calculate. Then, the image display control unit 500 sets the predetermined image display area 720 and the like based on the calculated light reception information a1 to d1 of the illumination light and the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the light reception sensor 180. Thus, the predetermined image display area 720 can be appropriately set reflecting the current brightness of the illumination light. Therefore, even if the brightness of the illumination light generated from the irradiation unit 302 changes with ambient temperature change or aging deterioration, the display of the predetermined image 721 or the like can be appropriately controlled.
 《実施形態12》
 上述の実施形態1では、画素毎に色が異なるカラーフィルター層が形成された。しかし、カラー表示を行う場合、本発明はこのような実施形態に限定されることはない。本実施形態12では、メモリ液晶層36中に色素が混入されることによりカラー表示が行われる。図42A及び図42Bは、メモリ液晶層36中に色素が混入されることによりカラー表示を行う実施形態を説明する図である。図42Aは混入させた色素の出射光を吸収させる場合を示す。図42Bは混入させた色素の出射光を外部に照射させる場合を示す。ここでは図4に示した3つの透明基板にて表示装置900を構成する場合を例示して説明する。
<< Embodiment 12 >>
In Embodiment 1 described above, color filter layers having different colors for each pixel are formed. However, when performing color display, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. In the twelfth embodiment, color display is performed by mixing a dye into the memory liquid crystal layer 36. 42A and 42B are diagrams illustrating an embodiment in which color display is performed by mixing a dye into the memory liquid crystal layer 36. FIG. 42A shows a case where the emitted light of the mixed dye is absorbed. FIG. 42B shows the case where the emitted light of the mixed pigment is irradiated to the outside. Here, a case where the display device 900 is configured with the three transparent substrates illustrated in FIG. 4 will be described as an example.
 混入させた色素が例えば緑色色素の場合、メモリ液晶層36に対して電界を形成していない時には、図42Aに示すように、緑色光160は液晶分子に混入された緑色色素で吸収されて視認方向に出射されないが、緑色光以外の出射光161は、緑色色素において吸収されることなく、液晶分子に混入された緑色色素で散乱されて、視角の拡大した表示を得ることができる。一方で、メモリ液晶層36に対して電界の形成時には、図42Bに示すように、緑色光160は色素に吸収されることなく出射され、緑色光以外の出射光161も、液晶分子に混入された緑色色素に吸収されることなく散乱されて出射されるので、全入射光が出射されて白色光となる。以上より、例えば、赤、緑、青の三原色の色素を各画素毎に混入することにより、カラー表示を行うことができる。 When the mixed dye is, for example, a green dye, when no electric field is formed with respect to the memory liquid crystal layer 36, as shown in FIG. 42A, the green light 160 is absorbed by the green dye mixed with the liquid crystal molecules and visually recognized. Although it is not emitted in the direction, the emitted light 161 other than the green light is not absorbed by the green dye, but is scattered by the green dye mixed in the liquid crystal molecules, and a display with an enlarged viewing angle can be obtained. On the other hand, when an electric field is formed on the memory liquid crystal layer 36, as shown in FIG. 42B, the green light 160 is emitted without being absorbed by the dye, and the emitted light 161 other than the green light is also mixed into the liquid crystal molecules. Since the green pigment is scattered and emitted without being absorbed, all incident light is emitted and becomes white light. As described above, for example, color display can be performed by mixing red, green, and blue primary color pigments for each pixel.
 《実施形態13》
 実施形態13では、所定画像表示エリア720の画像の視角依存性を可変にする実施形態を説明する。図43A及び図43Bは、所定画像表示エリア720の画像の視角依存性を可変にする実施形態を説明する図である。図43Aは視覚依存性の少ない表示を行う場合を示す。図43Bは視覚依存性の多い表示を行う場合を示す。ここでは図4に示した3つの透明基板にて表示装置900を構成する場合を例示して説明する。
<< Embodiment 13 >>
In the thirteenth embodiment, an embodiment in which the viewing angle dependency of the image of the predetermined image display area 720 is made variable will be described. 43A and 43B are diagrams illustrating an embodiment in which the viewing angle dependency of an image in the predetermined image display area 720 is variable. FIG. 43A shows a case where display with less visual dependency is performed. FIG. 43B shows a case where a display with much visual dependency is performed. Here, a case where the display device 900 is configured with the three transparent substrates illustrated in FIG. 4 will be described as an example.
 図43Aに示すように、メモリ液晶層36に対して液晶分子が配向するように電界を形成する場合にあっては、印加電界により液晶分子が電界にほぼ平行に配列するため、出射光は散乱されることなくそのまま出射される。そのため視覚依存性の多い表示(視野角の狭い表示)が可能となり、例えば、本実施形態に係る表示装置900をデジタルサイネージ表示装置として使用する場合において、小数の観察者に対して表示を行う際に、輝度及びコントラスト比を高くして表示できる。 As shown in FIG. 43A, when the electric field is formed so that the liquid crystal molecules are aligned with respect to the memory liquid crystal layer 36, the liquid crystal molecules are arranged substantially parallel to the electric field by the applied electric field. The light is emitted as it is. For this reason, display with high visual dependency (display with a narrow viewing angle) is possible. For example, when the display device 900 according to this embodiment is used as a digital signage display device, display is performed for a small number of observers. In addition, the brightness and contrast ratio can be increased.
 一方、図43Bに示すように、視覚依存性の少ない表示を行う場合(視野角の広い表示を行う場合)は、液晶分子がランダム状態(または完全ランダム状態と配向状態との間の状態)になるようにメモリ液晶層36に対して電界を形成する。これにより、全視角にわたってほぼ等方的に散乱される出射光が出射される。そのため、例えば、本実施形態に係る表示装置900をデジタルサイネージ表示装置として使用する場合において、多数の観察者に対して広い視覚範囲で表示を行う際に有利である。 On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43B, when a display with little visual dependency is performed (when a display with a wide viewing angle is performed), the liquid crystal molecules are in a random state (or a state between a completely random state and an alignment state). An electric field is formed with respect to the memory liquid crystal layer 36 in such a manner. Thereby, the emitted light scattered isotropically over the entire viewing angle is emitted. Therefore, for example, when the display device 900 according to the present embodiment is used as a digital signage display device, it is advantageous when displaying in a wide visual range for a large number of viewers.
 《実施形態14》
 実施形態14では、反射鏡板40を形成して、メモリ液晶層36内に進入した外部光を反射させて該メモリ液晶層36内で散乱させることにより、明色表示を強調させる。
<< Embodiment 14 >>
In the fourteenth embodiment, the light mirror display 40 is formed to reflect the external light that has entered the memory liquid crystal layer 36 and to scatter the light within the memory liquid crystal layer 36, thereby enhancing the bright color display.
 図44は、反射鏡板40を形成した表示装置900の説明図である。ここでは図4に示した3つの透明基板にて表示装置900を構成する場合を例示して説明する。反射鏡板40は、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200のメモリ液晶層36における光透過状態を形成する領域ではない領域に形成される。ここで、光透過状態を形成する領域ではない領域とは、光透過状態に寄与しない領域のことであり、特に限定されるものではないが、例えば、画素上の配線の上部である。また例えば、カラーフィルター層63が設けられ、画素毎を仕切るようにブラックマトリクス62が設けられている場合は、ブラックマトリクス62は光を透過しないため光透過状態に寄与しないので、このブラックマトリクス62の真下の領域が、光透過状態を形成する領域ではない領域である。図44では、反射鏡板40は、ブラックマトリクス62の真下の領域、かつ、共通透明基板15の正面内側に配置されている。画像表示制御部500は、明暗画像表示エリア710において、液晶表示パネル100の液晶層26を光非透過状態にする。バックライト制御部501は、明暗画像表示エリア710に対応するバックライト300の照射部302を消灯させる。 FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram of the display device 900 on which the reflecting mirror plate 40 is formed. Here, a case where the display device 900 is configured with the three transparent substrates illustrated in FIG. 4 will be described as an example. The reflecting mirror plate 40 is formed in a region that is not a region for forming a light transmission state in the memory liquid crystal layer 36 of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200. Here, the region that is not the region that forms the light transmission state is a region that does not contribute to the light transmission state, and is not particularly limited, but is, for example, the upper portion of the wiring on the pixel. Further, for example, when the color filter layer 63 is provided and the black matrix 62 is provided so as to partition each pixel, the black matrix 62 does not transmit light and therefore does not contribute to the light transmission state. The region directly below is a region that is not a region that forms a light transmission state. In FIG. 44, the reflecting mirror plate 40 is disposed in a region directly below the black matrix 62 and inside the front surface of the common transparent substrate 15. The image display control unit 500 puts the liquid crystal layer 26 of the liquid crystal display panel 100 in a light non-transmissive state in the light / dark image display area 710. The backlight control unit 501 turns off the irradiation unit 302 of the backlight 300 corresponding to the light and dark image display area 710.
 光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の所定箇所では、メモリ液晶層36における液晶分子38をランダム状態にし、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200のメモリ液晶層36を光散乱状態に変化させて、外部光163を散乱させることにより光散乱性液晶表示パネル200上の所定箇所に明色表示(例えば白色表示W)を行う。そして、液晶分子38により散乱せずに画素電極23の近傍に進入してきた入射光164は、反射鏡板40により反射されて液晶分子38により散乱されることにより明色表示を行う。光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の他の箇所では、入射光162が光透過状態のメモリ液晶層36に入射して反射されず、暗色表示(例えば黒色表示B)となる。これにより明色表示を強調させて画像のコントラスト比を強調させることができる。 At a predetermined location of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200, the liquid crystal molecules 38 in the memory liquid crystal layer 36 are set in a random state, and the memory liquid crystal layer 36 of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 is changed into a light scattering state. By scattering, light color display (for example, white display W) is performed at a predetermined position on the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200. The incident light 164 that has entered the vicinity of the pixel electrode 23 without being scattered by the liquid crystal molecules 38 is reflected by the reflecting mirror plate 40 and is scattered by the liquid crystal molecules 38, thereby performing bright color display. In other parts of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200, the incident light 162 is incident on the light-transmitting memory liquid crystal layer 36 and is not reflected, resulting in dark color display (for example, black display B). Thereby, it is possible to enhance the contrast ratio of the image by enhancing the bright color display.
 《実施形態15》
 上述の実施形態1~14においては、表示装置900は、単一の光散乱性液晶表示パネル200と単一の液晶表示パネル100とを備えて構成されたが、本発明の範囲はこのような実施形態に限定されることはない。
<< Embodiment 15 >>
In the above-described embodiments 1 to 14, the display device 900 is configured to include the single light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 and the single liquid crystal display panel 100. However, the scope of the present invention is such a range. The present invention is not limited to the embodiment.
 本実施形態15においては、図45に示されるように、単一の光散乱性液晶表示パネル200と単一の液晶表示パネル100とを備えて表示ユニット800を構成し、表示領域90には、その表示ユニット800(11)~800(86)がマトリクス状に配置されている。即ち、表示領域90を構成する複数の表示ユニット800(11)~800(86)が1つの表示画面を構成している。 In the fifteenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, a display unit 800 is configured by including a single light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 and a single liquid crystal display panel 100. The display units 800 (11) to 800 (86) are arranged in a matrix. That is, a plurality of display units 800 (11) to 800 (86) constituting the display area 90 constitute one display screen.
 そして、表示領域90には、明暗画像711が表示される明暗画像表示エリア710と、所定画像721が表示される所定画像表示エリア720とが形成される。表示装置900には、複数の受光センサ180が分散して設けられており、例えば受光センサ180は各表示ユニット800(11)~800(86)毎に所定個数配置されている。 In the display area 90, a light / dark image display area 710 for displaying a light / dark image 711 and a predetermined image display area 720 for displaying a predetermined image 721 are formed. In the display device 900, a plurality of light receiving sensors 180 are provided in a distributed manner. For example, a predetermined number of light receiving sensors 180 are arranged for each of the display units 800 (11) to 800 (86).
 表示装置900は、表示領域90を制御する制御部550をさらに備えている。制御部550には、受光センサ180及び外部処理装置421から信号が入力されるようになっている。外部処理装置421は、例えば、当該表示装置900の管理者等が操作する複数のパソコン(PC)等によって構成され、各々画像情報422及び優先情報423を有している。制御部550は、電子的処理装置であって、液晶パネル制御部520と、バックライト制御部501と、信号入力部521と、電源522と、画像表示制御部500とを備えている。そして、制御部550は、上記受光センサ180及び外部処理装置421から入力された信号に基づいて、各表示ユニット800(11)~800(86)を制御するように構成されている。画像表示制御部500は、各々の表示ユニット800(11)~800(86)を個別に駆動する。即ち、画像表示制御部500は、各々の光散乱性液晶表示パネル200を個別に駆動し、例えばメモリ液晶層36の配向のための駆動電力等は個別に制御される。また、画像表示制御部500は、各々の液晶表示パネル100も個別に駆動し、例えば液晶層26の配向のための駆動電力等は個別に制御される。 The display device 900 further includes a control unit 550 that controls the display area 90. Signals are input to the control unit 550 from the light receiving sensor 180 and the external processing device 421. The external processing device 421 is constituted by, for example, a plurality of personal computers (PCs) operated by an administrator of the display device 900, and has image information 422 and priority information 423, respectively. The control unit 550 is an electronic processing device, and includes a liquid crystal panel control unit 520, a backlight control unit 501, a signal input unit 521, a power source 522, and an image display control unit 500. The control unit 550 is configured to control each of the display units 800 (11) to 800 (86) based on signals input from the light receiving sensor 180 and the external processing device 421. The image display controller 500 individually drives each of the display units 800 (11) to 800 (86). That is, the image display control unit 500 drives each light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 individually, and for example, driving power for the alignment of the memory liquid crystal layer 36 is individually controlled. In addition, the image display control unit 500 also drives each liquid crystal display panel 100 individually, and for example, driving power for alignment of the liquid crystal layer 26 is individually controlled.
 各々の光散乱性液晶表示パネル200及び各々の液晶表示パネル100は個別に制御可能であるから、図45において、例えば、表示ユニット800(12)、800(13)、800(14)、800(15)、800(22)、800(23)、800(24)、800(25)、800(32)、800(33)、800(34)、及び800(35)は、暗色表示及び明色表示からなる明暗画像を表示し、そして例えば、800(61)、800(62)、800(63)、800(64)、800(65)、800(66)、800(71)、800(72)、800(73)、800(74)、800(75)、及び800(76)は、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の光散乱性液晶層を光透過状態にし、液晶表示パネル100の画像を表示する。そして例えば、表示ユニット800(11)、800(16)、800(21)、800(26)、800(31)、800(36)、800(41)、800(42)、800(43)、800(44)、800(45)、800(46)、800(51)、800(52)、800(53)、800(54)、800(55)、800(56)、800(81)、800(82)、800(83)、800(84)、800(85)、及び800(86)は、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の光散乱性液晶層を光透過状態にし、消費電力の省力化のために液晶表示パネル100の駆動を停止する。このように、各々の表示ユニット800を個別に制御できるから、表示装置900を大型化しても駆動電力の省電力化が可能となる。また、表示領域90の周辺の非表示部分である額縁の影響を少なくさせることも可能である。 Since each light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 and each liquid crystal display panel 100 can be individually controlled, in FIG. 45, for example, display units 800 (12), 800 (13), 800 (14), 800 ( 15), 800 (22), 800 (23), 800 (24), 800 (25), 800 (32), 800 (33), 800 (34), and 800 (35) are dark and light colors. A bright and dark image consisting of display is displayed, and for example, 800 (61), 800 (62), 800 (63), 800 (64), 800 (65), 800 (66), 800 (71), 800 (72 ), 800 (73), 800 (74), 800 (75), and 800 (76) make the light-scattering liquid crystal layer of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 in a light-transmitting state. Image to view the. And for example, display units 800 (11), 800 (16), 800 (21), 800 (26), 800 (31), 800 (36), 800 (41), 800 (42), 800 (43), 800 (44), 800 (45), 800 (46), 800 (51), 800 (52), 800 (53), 800 (54), 800 (55), 800 (56), 800 (81), 800 (82), 800 (83), 800 (84), 800 (85), and 800 (86) make the light-scattering liquid crystal layer of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 in a light-transmitting state, thereby saving power consumption. The driving of the liquid crystal display panel 100 is stopped for the purpose of the conversion. As described above, since each display unit 800 can be individually controlled, even when the display device 900 is enlarged, it is possible to save the driving power. It is also possible to reduce the influence of the frame, which is a non-display portion around the display area 90.
 図46は、外部光が表示領域90に照射された場合において、明暗画像表示エリア710と所定画像表示エリア720とを設定する状態を説明する図である。画像表示制御部500では、各表示ユニット800に配置された各受光センサ180よって得られた受光情報に対して基準値が予め定められる。そして、図46に示すように、画像表示制御部500は、基準値を上回る受光情報が受光センサ180によって得られたときに、当該受光情報に基づいて、表示領域90に明暗画像表示エリア710と所定画像表示エリア720とを設定し、明暗画像表示エリア710に明暗画像711を表示し、所定画像表示エリア720に所定画像721を表示する。 FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining a state in which a bright / dark image display area 710 and a predetermined image display area 720 are set when external light is irradiated on the display area 90. In the image display control unit 500, a reference value is predetermined for the light reception information obtained by each light reception sensor 180 arranged in each display unit 800. Then, as shown in FIG. 46, when the light receiving information exceeding the reference value is obtained by the light receiving sensor 180, the image display control unit 500 displays the light / dark image display area 710 in the display area 90 based on the light receiving information. A predetermined image display area 720 is set, a light / dark image 711 is displayed in the light / dark image display area 710, and a predetermined image 721 is displayed in the predetermined image display area 720.
 さらに、表示領域90における上記明暗画像表示エリア710及び所定画像表示エリア720以外の領域に、第3エリア730を設定することも可能である。第3エリア730を設けることにより表示領域90における表示のバリエーションを増加させることが可能となる。第3エリア730では、明暗画像711及び所定画像721以外の表示又は画像の非表示のいずれも可能であり、第3エリア730において画像を表示しない場合は、表示領域90における第3エリア730の割合だけ省電力化が可能となる。また、各々の光散乱性液晶表示パネル200及び各々の液晶表示パネル100は個別に制御可能であるから、図46において、表示ユニット800(11)、800(16)、800(26)、800(31)、800(36)、800(41)、800(42)、800(43)、800(44)、800(45)、800(46)、800(51)、800(52)、800(53)、800(54)、800(55)、及び800(56)は、光散乱性液晶表示パネル200の光散乱性液晶層を光透過状態にし、消費電力の省力化のために液晶表示パネル100の駆動を停止し、これにより駆動電力の省電力化が可能となる。 Furthermore, the third area 730 can be set in an area other than the bright and dark image display area 710 and the predetermined image display area 720 in the display area 90. By providing the third area 730, variations in display in the display area 90 can be increased. In the third area 730, display other than the bright and dark image 711 and the predetermined image 721 or non-display of the image can be performed. When no image is displayed in the third area 730, the ratio of the third area 730 in the display area 90 Only power saving is possible. Further, since each light scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 and each liquid crystal display panel 100 can be individually controlled, in FIG. 46, display units 800 (11), 800 (16), 800 (26), 800 ( 31), 800 (36), 800 (41), 800 (42), 800 (43), 800 (44), 800 (45), 800 (46), 800 (51), 800 (52), 800 ( 53), 800 (54), 800 (55), and 800 (56) make the light-scattering liquid crystal layer of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel 200 in a light-transmitting state, thereby reducing the power consumption. The driving of 100 is stopped, and thus it is possible to save driving power.
 本実施形態のように複数の表示ユニット800を集合させて1つの表示画面を構成することにより、例えば屋外等に設置される看板や広告、標識等の情報伝達媒体として利用されるインフォメーションディスプレイ、ビルボードディスプレイ等のような大型の表示装置が構成できる。 By combining a plurality of display units 800 to form a single display screen as in this embodiment, for example, an information display or building used as an information transmission medium such as a signboard, an advertisement, or a sign installed outdoors A large display device such as a board display can be configured.
 なお、上述の実施形態では、各表示ユニット800に受光センサ180を設けて、受光センサによって得られた受光情報に基づいて、所定画像表示エリア720と明暗画像表示エリア710とを設定したが、このような実施形態に限定されることはなく、表示画像の優先度を示す優先情報に基づいて、所定画像表示エリア720と明暗画像表示エリア710とを設定することも可能である。また、表示画像の表示内容に基づいて、所定画像表示エリア720と明暗画像表示エリア710とを設定することも可能である。 In the above-described embodiment, the light receiving sensor 180 is provided in each display unit 800, and the predetermined image display area 720 and the light / dark image display area 710 are set based on the light receiving information obtained by the light receiving sensor. The present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and the predetermined image display area 720 and the bright / dark image display area 710 can be set based on priority information indicating the priority of the display image. Also, it is possible to set the predetermined image display area 720 and the light / dark image display area 710 based on the display content of the display image.
 《実施形態16》
 図47は、表示モジュール920を模式的に示すブロック図である。表示装置900を製造する際、製造過程で表示モジュール920が作製される。表示モジュール920は、バックライト300に対向して配置されて表示装置900を構成し、図47に示すように、複数の画素が配置された表示領域90を有する表示装置900と、複数の受光センサ180と、演算部112と、出力端子114とを備えている。表示装置900は、表示領域90に複数の画像を同時に表示可能に構成されている。
Embodiment 16
FIG. 47 is a block diagram schematically showing the display module 920. As shown in FIG. When the display device 900 is manufactured, the display module 920 is manufactured in the manufacturing process. The display module 920 is disposed to face the backlight 300 to constitute the display device 900, and as shown in FIG. 47, the display device 900 having a display area 90 in which a plurality of pixels are disposed, and a plurality of light receiving sensors. 180, a calculation unit 112, and an output terminal 114. The display device 900 is configured to be able to simultaneously display a plurality of images in the display area 90.
 受光センサ180は、表示領域90にバックライト300と反対側から照射された外部光を受光するように、表示領域90に分散して配置されている。演算部112は、受光センサによって得られた受光情報a1~d1に基づいて、グラフィック表示や、明暗画像表示エリア710及び所定画像表示エリア720を含むエリアの照明光などを制御する制御信号を作成する。そして、出力端子114は、演算部112により作成された制御信号を出力する。 The light receiving sensors 180 are distributed in the display area 90 so as to receive external light emitted from the opposite side of the backlight 300 to the display area 90. Based on the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the light receiving sensor, the arithmetic unit 112 creates a control signal for controlling graphic display, illumination light in an area including the light / dark image display area 710 and the predetermined image display area 720, and the like. . The output terminal 114 outputs the control signal created by the calculation unit 112.
 この表示モジュール920を用いると、受光センサ180によって得られた受光情報a1~d1に基づいて、明暗画像表示エリア710に表示される明暗画像711及び所定画像表示エリア720に表示される所定画像721の表示制御が可能な表示装置900を製造することができる。 When this display module 920 is used, the light / dark image 711 displayed in the light / dark image display area 710 and the predetermined image 721 displayed in the predetermined image display area 720 are based on the light reception information a1 to d1 obtained by the light receiving sensor 180. A display device 900 capable of display control can be manufactured.
 また、出力端子114に画像表示制御部500を接続させ、画像表示制御部500を備えた表示モジュール920を作成することもできる。この場合、画像表示制御部500には、受光センサ180によって得られた受光情報a1~d1に対して基準値が予め定められており、基準値を上回る受光情報a1~d1が受光センサ180によって得られた場合に、当該受光情報a1~d1に基づいて、表示領域90に明暗画像表示エリア710及び所定画像表示エリア720を設定し、当該明暗画像表示エリア710に明暗画像711を表示し、そして当該所定画像表示エリア720に所定画像721を表示する。 Further, the display module 920 including the image display control unit 500 can be created by connecting the image display control unit 500 to the output terminal 114. In this case, the image display control unit 500 has predetermined reference values for the received light information a1 to d1 obtained by the light receiving sensor 180, and the received light information a1 to d1 exceeding the reference value is obtained by the received light sensor 180. If this is the case, based on the received light information a1 to d1, a bright / dark image display area 710 and a predetermined image display area 720 are set in the display area 90, a bright / dark image 711 is displayed in the bright / dark image display area 710, and A predetermined image 721 is displayed in the predetermined image display area 720.
 《その他の実施形態》
 上述の実施形態では、画像表示パネルとして液晶表示パネル100を用いたが、本発明はこのような実施形態に限定されることはなく、画像表示パネルとして、例えば有機EL表示パネル、無機EL表示パネル、及びプラズマディスプレイパネルのように、一対のガラス基板上に各々表示要素を形成し、その一対のガラス基板を対向配置した各種の画像表示パネルを用いることができる。
<< Other Embodiments >>
In the above-described embodiment, the liquid crystal display panel 100 is used as the image display panel. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and examples of the image display panel include an organic EL display panel and an inorganic EL display panel. Various image display panels in which display elements are formed on a pair of glass substrates and the pair of glass substrates are arranged to face each other can be used as in a plasma display panel.
 また、上記実施形態に係る表示装置900の使用例は、デジタルサイネージに限定されることはなく、例えば、家庭にて使用される液晶テレビ、パーソナルコンピュータ、電子ブック、デジタルスチルカメラ、ビデオテープレコーダ、カーナビゲーション装置、電卓、電子手帳、ワードプロセッサ、ワークステーション、テレビ電話、POS端末等の画像表示手段として好適に用いることができる。 In addition, the usage example of the display device 900 according to the above embodiment is not limited to digital signage. For example, a liquid crystal television, a personal computer, an electronic book, a digital still camera, a video tape recorder, It can be suitably used as image display means for car navigation devices, calculators, electronic notebooks, word processors, workstations, videophones, POS terminals and the like.
 本発明に係る表示装置は、省電力状態でも、宣伝・識別媒体として十分に利用できる情報表示が可能なので、デジタルサイネージのような広告表示に好適に利用される。 Since the display device according to the present invention can display information that can be sufficiently used as an advertisement / identification medium even in a power-saving state, it can be suitably used for advertisement display such as digital signage.
 11:第1透明基板
 12:第2透明基板
 13:第3透明基板
 14:第4透明基板
 15:共通透明基板
 21:信号線
 22:走査線
 23,33:画素電極
 24:薄膜トランジスタ(TFT)
 25,35:対向電極
 26:液晶層
 29、39:シール材
 30:制御信号線
 31:下偏光板
 32:上偏光板
 36:メモリ液晶層
 38:液晶分子
 40:反射鏡板
 62:ブラックマトリクス
 80:表示画素
 90:表示領域
 100:液晶表示パネル
 110:ゲートドライバ
 120:ソースドライバ
 180:光センサ
 200:光散乱性液晶表示パネル
 300:バックライト
 301:バックライトシャーシ
 302:照射部
 410:電子看板装置
 411:通信回路制御部
 412:受信データメモリ
 413:ブラウザメモリ
 414:URLメモリ
 420:インターネット
 421:外部処理装置
 422:画像情報
 423:優先情報
 500:画像表示制御部
 501:バックライト制御部
 520:液晶パネル制御部
 521:信号入力部
 522:電源
 540:間欠駆動制御部
 710:明暗画像表示エリア
 711:明暗画像
 720:所定画像表示エリア
 721:所定画像
 730:第3エリア
 800:表示ユニット
 900:液晶装置
 910:画像表示システム
 920:表示モジュール
11: First transparent substrate 12: Second transparent substrate 13: Third transparent substrate 14: Fourth transparent substrate 15: Common transparent substrate 21: Signal line 22: Scan line 23, 33: Pixel electrode 24: Thin film transistor (TFT)
25, 35: Counter electrode 26: Liquid crystal layer 29, 39: Sealing material 30: Control signal line 31: Lower polarizing plate 32: Upper polarizing plate 36: Memory liquid crystal layer 38: Liquid crystal molecule 40: Reflecting mirror plate 62: Black matrix 80: Display pixel 90: Display area 100: Liquid crystal display panel 110: Gate driver 120: Source driver 180: Optical sensor 200: Light scattering liquid crystal display panel 300: Backlight 301: Backlight chassis 302: Irradiation unit 410: Electronic signage device 411 : Communication circuit control unit 412: Received data memory 413: Browser memory 414: URL memory 420: Internet 421: External processing device 422: Image information 423: Priority information 500: Image display control unit 501: Backlight control unit 520: Liquid crystal panel Control unit 521: signal input unit 52 : Power 540: intermittent drive control unit 710: light-and-dark image display area 711: light-and-dark image 720: predetermined image display area 721: the predetermined image 730: third area 800: display unit 900: liquid crystal device 910: an image display system 920: display module

Claims (44)

  1.  透明基板間に光散乱性液晶層が挟持されてなる光散乱性液晶表示パネルと、
     前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルの背面側に配置され、画像を形成する画像表示パネルと、を備えた表示装置であって、
     表示面の表示領域に、前記光散乱性液晶層を光透過状態にする暗色表示、及び、該暗色表示と異なる箇所にて光散乱性液晶層を光散乱状態にする明色表示を組み合わせることにより、明暗画像を表示する明暗画像表示エリアと、前記光散乱性液晶層を光透過状態とすることにより、前記画像表示パネルにて形成される所定画像を前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルを介して表示する所定画像表示エリアと、が設定されるように制御する画像表示制御部を備えたことを特徴とする表示装置。
    A light-scattering liquid crystal display panel in which a light-scattering liquid crystal layer is sandwiched between transparent substrates;
    An image display panel disposed on the back side of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel and forming an image, and a display device comprising:
    By combining the display area of the display surface with a dark color display in which the light scattering liquid crystal layer is in a light transmission state and a light color display in which the light scattering liquid crystal layer is in a light scattering state at a location different from the dark color display. By displaying the light / dark image display area for displaying the light / dark image and the light scattering liquid crystal layer in a light transmitting state, a predetermined image formed on the image display panel is displayed via the light scattering liquid crystal display panel. A display device comprising: an image display control unit configured to control a predetermined image display area to be set.
  2.  前記表示装置の表示面の表示領域に照射された外部光を受光する複数の受光センサを備え、
     前記画像表示制御部は、前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に対して基準値が予め定められており、前記基準値を上回る受光情報が前記受光センサによって得られたときに、当該受光情報に基づいて、前記所定画像表示エリアと前記明暗画像表示エリアとを設定することを特徴とする請求項1に記載の表示装置。
    A plurality of light receiving sensors for receiving external light applied to the display area of the display surface of the display device;
    In the image display control unit, a reference value is predetermined for the light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor, and when the light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained by the light reception sensor, the light reception information is included in the light reception information. The display device according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined image display area and the bright / dark image display area are set based on the predetermined image display area.
  3.  前記画像表示制御部は、前記明暗画像表示エリアの大きさに応じて前記明暗画像の大きさを変更することを特徴とする請求項2に記載の表示装置。 3. The display device according to claim 2, wherein the image display control unit changes a size of the light / dark image according to a size of the light / dark image display area.
  4.  前記画像表示制御部は、前記所定画像表示エリアの大きさに応じて前記所定画像の大きさを変更することを特徴とする請求項2又は3に記載の表示装置。 4. The display device according to claim 2, wherein the image display control unit changes a size of the predetermined image according to a size of the predetermined image display area.
  5.  前記画像表示制御部は、前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に基づいて、前記表示領域のうち前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた部位を除いた領域に、前記所定画像表示エリアの主領域を設定することを特徴とする請求項2乃至4の何れか1項に記載の表示装置。 The image display control unit is configured such that, based on the light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor, the main area of the predetermined image display area is excluded from the display area except for a part where the light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained. The display device according to any one of claims 2 to 4, wherein an area is set.
  6.  前記画像表示制御部は、前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に基づいて、前記表示領域のうち前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた部位を除いた領域に、少なくとも前記所定画像表示エリアの中央部を位置するように設定することを特徴とする請求項2乃至4の何れか1項に記載の表示装置。 The image display control unit includes at least the predetermined image display area in an area excluding a part of the display area where light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained based on light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor. The display device according to claim 2, wherein the display device is set so as to be positioned at a central portion.
  7.  前記画像表示制御部は、前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に基づいて、前記表示領域のうち前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた部位を除いた領域に、前記所定画像表示エリアを設定することを特徴とする請求項2乃至4の何れか1項に記載の表示装置。 The image display control unit sets the predetermined image display area in an area excluding a part of the display area where light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained based on light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor. The display device according to claim 2, wherein the display device is a display device.
  8.  前記画像表示制御部は、前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に基づいて、前記表示領域のうち前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた領域に、前記明暗画像表示エリアの主領域を設定することを特徴とする請求項2乃至7の何れか1項に記載の表示装置。 The image display control unit sets a main region of the bright and dark image display area in a region where light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained in the display region based on light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor. The display device according to claim 2, wherein the display device is a display device.
  9.  前記画像表示制御部は、前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に基づいて、前記表示領域のうち前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた領域に、前記明暗画像表示エリアの中央部を設定することを特徴とする請求項2乃至7の何れか1項に記載の表示装置。 The image display control unit sets a central portion of the bright and dark image display area in a region where light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained in the display region based on light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor. The display device according to claim 2, wherein the display device is a display device.
  10.  前記画像表示制御部は、前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に基づいて、前記表示領域のうち前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた領域に、前記明暗画像表示エリアを設定することを特徴とする請求項2乃至7の何れか1項に記載の表示装置。 The image display control unit sets the bright and dark image display area in an area where light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained in the display area based on light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor. The display device according to any one of claims 2 to 7.
  11.  前記画像表示制御部は、前記表示領域を面積が互いに等しい左右又は上下の2つの領域に分けた場合に、前記2つの領域のうち前記基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた部位の面積が小さい一方の領域に前記所定画像表示エリアを設定する一方、他方の領域に前記明暗画像表示エリアを設定することを特徴とする請求項2乃至4の何れか1項に記載の表示装置。 The image display control unit, when dividing the display area into two areas of right and left or upper and lower areas having the same area, has a small area of the part where the received light information exceeding the reference value is obtained in the two areas 5. The display device according to claim 2, wherein the predetermined image display area is set in one area, and the bright and dark image display area is set in the other area. 6.
  12.  前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に対して前記基準値よりも高い高度基準値が予め定められており、前記高度基準値を上回る受光情報が前記受光センサによって得られたときに、前記画像表示制御部は、当該受光情報に基づいて、前記表示領域のうち前記高度基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた部位を除いた領域に、前記所定画像表示エリア及び前記明暗画像表示エリアを設定することを特徴とする請求項2乃至4の何れか1項に記載の表示装置。 An altitude reference value higher than the reference value is predetermined for the light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor, and when the light reception information exceeding the height reference value is obtained by the light reception sensor, the image display The control unit sets the predetermined image display area and the light / dark image display area in an area excluding a part of the display area where the received light information exceeding the altitude reference value is obtained based on the received light information. The display device according to claim 2, wherein the display device is a display device.
  13.  前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に対して前記基準値よりも高い高度基準値が予め定められており、前記高度基準値を上回る受光情報が前記受光センサによって得られる面積が表示領域の面積に対して一定の割合を上回った場合、前記画像表示制御部は、前記表示領域に画像を表示することを一時的に停止させることを特徴とする請求項2乃至4の何れか1項に記載の表示装置。 An altitude reference value higher than the reference value is predetermined for the light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor, and the area obtained by the light reception sensor for the light reception information exceeding the altitude reference value is the area of the display region. 5. The display according to claim 2, wherein when the ratio exceeds a certain ratio, the image display control unit temporarily stops displaying an image in the display area. 6. Display device.
  14.  前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に対して前記基準値よりも高い高度基準値が予め定められており、前記表示領域の中央部分において、前記高度基準値を上回る受光情報が前記受光センサによって得られたときに、前記画像表示制御部は、前記表示領域に画像を表示することを一時的に停止させることを特徴とする請求項2乃至4の何れか1項に記載の表示装置。 An altitude reference value higher than the reference value is predetermined for the light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor, and light reception information exceeding the altitude reference value is obtained by the light reception sensor in the central portion of the display area. 5. The display device according to claim 2, wherein the image display control unit temporarily stops displaying an image in the display area when the display is performed.
  15.  前記画像表示制御部は、予め定められた時間に継続して、前記基準値を上回る受光情報が前記受光センサによって得られた場合に、当該受光情報に基づいて、前記所定画像表示エリアと前記明暗画像表示エリアとを設定することを特徴とする請求項2乃至12の何れか1項に記載の表示装置。 The image display control unit, when continuously receiving light information exceeding the reference value is obtained by the light receiving sensor at a predetermined time, based on the light reception information, the predetermined image display area and the brightness / darkness. The display device according to claim 2, wherein an image display area is set.
  16.  前記受光センサは、前記表示領域に分散して配置されていることを特徴とする請求項2乃至15の何れか1項に記載の表示装置。 The display device according to any one of claims 2 to 15, wherein the light receiving sensors are distributed in the display area.
  17.  前記受光センサは、前記液晶パネルの平面視において前記画素が形成された領域に各々配置されていることを特徴とする請求項16に記載の表示装置。 The display device according to claim 16, wherein the light receiving sensors are respectively disposed in regions where the pixels are formed in a plan view of the liquid crystal panel.
  18.  前記受光センサは、前記表示領域を横断又は縦断するように設定された線に沿って分散して配置されていることを特徴とする請求項16に記載の表示装置。 17. The display device according to claim 16, wherein the light receiving sensors are distributed along a line set so as to cross or longitudinally cross the display area.
  19.  前記表示領域は矩形状であり、
     前記受光センサは、前記表示領域の四辺のうち少なくとも対向した二辺の各中点を結ぶ線に沿って前記表示領域に配置されていることを特徴とする請求項16に記載の表示装置。
    The display area is rectangular,
    The display device according to claim 16, wherein the light receiving sensor is arranged in the display area along a line connecting the midpoints of at least two opposite sides of the four sides of the display area.
  20.  前記表示領域は矩形状であり、
     前記受光センサは、前記表示領域の四辺のうち少なくとも対向した二辺に沿った前記表示領域の周縁部に配置されていることを特徴とする請求項16に記載の表示装置。
    The display area is rectangular,
    The display device according to claim 16, wherein the light receiving sensor is arranged at a peripheral portion of the display area along at least two opposite sides of the four sides of the display area.
  21.  前記表示領域は矩形状であり、
     前記受光センサは、前記表示領域の対角線の少なくとも一方に沿って配置されていることを特徴とする請求項16に記載の表示装置。
    The display area is rectangular,
    The display device according to claim 16, wherein the light receiving sensor is disposed along at least one of diagonal lines of the display area.
  22.  表示画像の優先度を示す優先情報が表示画像ごとに予め定められており、
     前記画像表示制御部は、当該優先情報に基づいて、前記所定画像表示エリアと前記明暗画像表示エリアとを設定することを特徴とする請求項1に記載の表示装置。
    Priority information indicating the priority of the display image is predetermined for each display image,
    The display device according to claim 1, wherein the image display control unit sets the predetermined image display area and the bright / dark image display area based on the priority information.
  23.  前記優先情報は、時刻に依存してその優先度が変更されることを特徴とする請求項22に記載の表示装置。 The display device according to claim 22, wherein the priority of the priority information is changed depending on time.
  24.  前記画像表示制御部は、表示画像の表示内容に基づいて、前記所定画像表示エリアと前記明暗画像表示エリアとを設定することを特徴とする請求項1に記載の表示装置。 The display device according to claim 1, wherein the image display control unit sets the predetermined image display area and the bright and dark image display area based on display content of a display image.
  25.  前記画像表示制御部は、表示装置の表示面の表示領域に、前記所定画像表示エリア及び前記明暗画像表示エリア以外の第3エリアを設定することを特徴とする請求項1乃至24の何れか1項に記載の表示装置。 The image display control unit sets a third area other than the predetermined image display area and the bright / dark image display area in a display area of a display surface of a display device. The display device according to item.
  26.  前記第3エリアでは、画像を表示しないことを特徴とする請求項25に記載の表示装置。 26. The display device according to claim 25, wherein no image is displayed in the third area.
  27.  前記画像表示パネルは、液晶層を透明基板間に挟持して構成された液晶表示パネルであり、
     前記液晶表示パネルの背面側に照明光を照射するバックライトと、
     前記バックライトの点灯及び消灯状態を制御するバックライト制御部と、を備えていることを特徴とする請求項1乃至26の何れか1項に記載の表示装置。
    The image display panel is a liquid crystal display panel configured by sandwiching a liquid crystal layer between transparent substrates,
    A backlight for illuminating illumination light on the back side of the liquid crystal display panel;
    The display device according to any one of claims 1 to 26, further comprising: a backlight control unit that controls lighting and extinguishing states of the backlight.
  28.  前記画像表示制御部は、前記明暗画像表示エリアに対応する前記液晶表示パネルの液晶層を光非透過状態にすることを特徴とする請求項27に記載の表示装置。 28. The display device according to claim 27, wherein the image display control unit sets a liquid crystal layer of the liquid crystal display panel corresponding to the light and dark image display area in a light non-transmissive state.
  29.  前記バックライト制御部は、前記所定画像表示領域に対応するバックライトを点灯させ、一方、前記明暗画像表示領域に対応するバックライトは消灯させるか、又は、低消費電力状態で点灯させることを特徴とする請求項27又は28に記載の表示装置。 The backlight control unit turns on a backlight corresponding to the predetermined image display area, while turning off a backlight corresponding to the light and dark image display area, or turns it on in a low power consumption state. The display device according to claim 27 or 28.
  30.  前記バックライトは、複数の発光部を有し、
     前記バックライト制御部は、前記所定画像表示領域に対応するバックライトを点灯させ、一方、前記明暗画像表示領域に対応するバックライトの該発光部の一部を点灯させ、前記明暗画像表示領域に対応するバックライトの該発光部の他の部分を消灯させることを特徴とする請求項27又は28に記載の表示装置。
    The backlight has a plurality of light emitting portions,
    The backlight control unit turns on a backlight corresponding to the predetermined image display area, while turning on a part of the light emitting unit of the backlight corresponding to the light / dark image display area, and enters the light / dark image display area. 29. The display device according to claim 27 or 28, wherein the other part of the light emitting unit of the corresponding backlight is turned off.
  31.  前記画像表示パネルは、液晶層を透明基板間に挟持して構成された液晶表示パネルであり、
     前記液晶表示パネルの背面側に照明光を照射するバックライトと、
     前記バックライトの点灯及び消灯状態を制御するバックライト制御部と、
     前記バックライトを消灯させる消灯期間と、該バックライトを点灯させる点灯期間とを交互に切り替える間欠駆動制御部と、を備え、
     前記画像表示制御部は、前記間欠駆動制御部により前記バックライトが消灯期間のときに前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に基づき前記所定画像表示エリアと前記明暗画像表示エリアとを設定することを特徴とする請求項2乃至21の何れか1項に記載の表示装置。
    The image display panel is a liquid crystal display panel configured by sandwiching a liquid crystal layer between transparent substrates,
    A backlight for illuminating illumination light on the back side of the liquid crystal display panel;
    A backlight control unit for controlling the lighting and extinguishing state of the backlight;
    An intermittent drive controller that alternately switches between a turn-off period for turning off the backlight and a turn-on period for turning on the backlight;
    The image display control unit sets the predetermined image display area and the light / dark image display area based on light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor when the backlight is turned off by the intermittent drive control unit. The display device according to claim 2, wherein the display device is a display device.
  32.  前記受光センサは、前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルの内部に配置されていることを特徴とする請求項2乃至21の何れか1項に記載の表示装置。 The display device according to any one of claims 2 to 21, wherein the light receiving sensor is disposed inside the light scattering liquid crystal display panel.
  33.  前記受光センサは、前記液晶表示パネルの内部に配置されていることを特徴とする請求項31記載の表示装置。 32. The display device according to claim 31, wherein the light receiving sensor is disposed inside the liquid crystal display panel.
  34.  前記受光センサは、前記バックライトに配置されていることを特徴とする請求項31記載の表示装置。 32. The display device according to claim 31, wherein the light receiving sensor is disposed in the backlight.
  35.  前記受光センサは、前記液晶表示パネルと前記バックライトとの間に配置されていることを特徴とする請求項31記載の表示装置。 32. The display device according to claim 31, wherein the light receiving sensor is disposed between the liquid crystal display panel and the backlight.
  36.  前記画像表示パネルの正面側の透明基板と、前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルの背面側の透明基板とが共通して一つの透明基板であることを特徴とする請求項27乃至30の何れか1項に記載の表示装置。 31. The transparent substrate on the front side of the image display panel and the transparent substrate on the back side of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel are a single transparent substrate in common. The display device according to item.
  37.  前記光散乱性液晶層は、メモリ液晶層であることを特徴とする請求項1乃至36の何れか1項に記載の表示装置。 The display device according to any one of claims 1 to 36, wherein the light-scattering liquid crystal layer is a memory liquid crystal layer.
  38.  インターネット又は放送局のデジタル放送波を介して配信されるデジタルサイネージのコンテンツの映像データ及び音声データの少なくとも何れか一つを含むデータを受信し、受信したデジタルサイネージのコンテンツを前記光散乱性液晶表示パネル及び前記画像表示パネルの少なくとも何れか一方にて表示することを特徴とする請求項1乃至37の何れか1項に記載の表示装置。 Receive data including at least one of video data and audio data of digital signage content distributed via digital broadcast waves of the Internet or a broadcasting station, and display the received digital signage content on the light scattering liquid crystal display The display device according to any one of claims 1 to 37, wherein display is performed on at least one of a panel and the image display panel.
  39.  前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルは、光散乱性液晶層を透明基板間に挟持して構成された個別の光散乱性液晶表示パネルが複数集合し、全体として一つの表示パネルを形成しており、
     前記画像表示パネルも、画像を形成する個別の画像表示パネルが複数集合し、全体として一つの表示パネルを形成している、ことを特徴とする請求項1乃至38の何れか1項に記載の表示装置。
    The light-scattering liquid crystal display panel is a collection of a plurality of individual light-scattering liquid crystal display panels configured by sandwiching a light-scattering liquid crystal layer between transparent substrates, forming a single display panel as a whole,
    39. The image display panel according to any one of claims 1 to 38, wherein a plurality of individual image display panels forming an image are aggregated to form one display panel as a whole. Display device.
  40.  前記画像表示制御部は、前記個別の光散乱性液晶表示パネル及び前記個別の画像表示パネルを各々独立して制御することを特徴とする請求項39に記載の表示装置。 40. The display device according to claim 39, wherein the image display control unit independently controls the individual light-scattering liquid crystal display panel and the individual image display panel.
  41.  透明基板間に光散乱性液晶層が挟持されてなる光散乱性液晶表示パネルと、
     前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルの背面側に配置され、画像を形成する画像表示パネルと、を備え、
     表示面の表示領域に、前記光散乱性液晶層を光透過状態にする暗色表示、及び、該暗色表示と異なる箇所にて光散乱性液晶層を光散乱状態にする明色表示を組み合わせることにより、明暗画像を表示する明暗画像表示エリアと、前記光散乱性液晶層を光透過状態とすることにより、前記画像表示パネルにて形成される所定画像を前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルを介して表示する所定画像表示エリアと、を有するように設定されることを特徴とする表示パネル。
    A light-scattering liquid crystal display panel in which a light-scattering liquid crystal layer is sandwiched between transparent substrates;
    An image display panel disposed on the back side of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel and forming an image,
    By combining the display area of the display surface with a dark color display in which the light scattering liquid crystal layer is in a light transmission state and a light color display in which the light scattering liquid crystal layer is in a light scattering state at a location different from the dark color display. By displaying the light / dark image display area for displaying the light / dark image and the light scattering liquid crystal layer in a light transmitting state, a predetermined image formed on the image display panel is displayed via the light scattering liquid crystal display panel. And a predetermined image display area that is set to have a display panel.
  42.  透明基板間に光散乱性液晶層が挟持されてなる光散乱性液晶表示パネルと、
     前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルの背面側に配置され、画像を形成する画像表示パネルと、
     表示面の表示領域に照射された外部光を受光する複数の受光センサと、を備えた表示モジュールであって、
     前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に対して基準値が予め定められており、前記基準値を上回る受光情報が前記受光センサによって得られたときに、当該受光情報に基づいて、前記光散乱性液晶層を光透過状態にする暗色表示、及び、該暗色表示と異なる箇所にて光散乱性液晶層を光散乱状態にする明色表示を組み合わせることにより、明暗画像を表示する明暗画像表示エリアと、前記光散乱性液晶層を光透過状態とすることにより、前記画像表示パネルにて形成される所定画像を前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルを介して表示する所定画像表示エリアと、を表示面の表示領域に有するように設定されることを特徴とする表示モジュール。
    A light-scattering liquid crystal display panel in which a light-scattering liquid crystal layer is sandwiched between transparent substrates;
    An image display panel disposed on the back side of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel to form an image;
    A plurality of light receiving sensors for receiving external light irradiated on a display area of a display surface, and a display module comprising:
    A reference value is predetermined for the light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor, and when the light reception information exceeding the reference value is obtained by the light reception sensor, the light scattering property is based on the light reception information. A light-dark image display area for displaying a light-dark image by combining a dark-color display in which the liquid crystal layer is in a light-transmitting state and a light-color display in which the light-scattering liquid crystal layer is in a light-scattering state at a location different from the dark color display; A predetermined image display area for displaying a predetermined image formed on the image display panel via the light scattering liquid crystal display panel by setting the light scattering liquid crystal layer in a light transmitting state. A display module which is set to have a display area.
  43.  透明基板間に光散乱性液晶層が挟持されてなる光散乱性液晶表示パネル、及び、前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルの背面側に配置されて画像を形成する画像表示パネルを有する表示装置と、
     表示面の表示領域に画像を表示させる画像信号を作成し、前記画像信号を前記表示装置に送る外部処理装置と、を備えた画像表示システムであって、
     表示面の表示領域に、前記光散乱性液晶層を光透過状態にする暗色表示、及び、該暗色表示と異なる箇所にて光散乱性液晶層を光散乱状態にする明色表示を組み合わせることにより、明暗画像を表示する明暗画像表示エリアと、前記光散乱性液晶層を光透過状態とすることにより、前記画像表示パネルにて形成される所定画像を前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルを介して表示する所定画像表示エリアと、を有するように設定する画像表示制御部を有していることを特徴とする画像表示システム。
    A light-scattering liquid crystal display panel in which a light-scattering liquid crystal layer is sandwiched between transparent substrates, and a display device having an image display panel disposed on the back side of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel to form an image;
    An image display system comprising: an external processing device that creates an image signal for displaying an image on a display area of a display surface and sends the image signal to the display device,
    By combining the display area of the display surface with a dark color display in which the light scattering liquid crystal layer is in a light transmission state and a light color display in which the light scattering liquid crystal layer is in a light scattering state at a location different from the dark color display. By displaying the light / dark image display area for displaying the light / dark image and the light scattering liquid crystal layer in a light transmitting state, a predetermined image formed on the image display panel is displayed via the light scattering liquid crystal display panel. And a predetermined image display area, and an image display control unit configured to have a predetermined image display area.
  44.  透明基板間に光散乱性液晶層が挟持されてなる光散乱性液晶表示パネルと、
     前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルの背面側に配置され、画像を形成する画像表示パネルと、を備えた表示装置に対して、
     表示面の表示領域に、前記光散乱性液晶層を光透過状態にする暗色表示、及び、該暗色表示と異なる箇所にて光散乱性液晶層を光散乱状態にする明色表示を組み合わせることにより、明暗画像を表示する明暗画像表示エリアと、前記光散乱性液晶層を光透過状態とすることにより、前記画像表示パネルにて形成される所定画像を前記光散乱性液晶表示パネルを介して表示する所定画像表示エリアと、を有するように画像を表示する画像表示方法。
    A light-scattering liquid crystal display panel in which a light-scattering liquid crystal layer is sandwiched between transparent substrates;
    An image display panel that is disposed on the back side of the light-scattering liquid crystal display panel and forms an image.
    By combining the display area of the display surface with a dark color display in which the light scattering liquid crystal layer is in a light transmission state and a light color display in which the light scattering liquid crystal layer is in a light scattering state at a location different from the dark color display. By displaying the light / dark image display area for displaying the light / dark image and the light scattering liquid crystal layer in a light transmitting state, a predetermined image formed on the image display panel is displayed via the light scattering liquid crystal display panel. An image display method for displaying an image so as to have a predetermined image display area.
PCT/JP2011/004910 2010-09-07 2011-09-01 Display device, display panel, display module, image display system, and image display method WO2012032745A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2010-200098 2010-09-07
JP2010200098 2010-09-07

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2012032745A1 true WO2012032745A1 (en) 2012-03-15

Family

ID=45810355

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2011/004910 WO2012032745A1 (en) 2010-09-07 2011-09-01 Display device, display panel, display module, image display system, and image display method

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2012032745A1 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103293738A (en) * 2012-10-19 2013-09-11 上海天马微电子有限公司 Liquid crystal display device and control method thereof
KR20170078556A (en) * 2015-10-09 2017-07-07 시아오미 아이엔씨. Liquid crystal display assembly and electronic device
US20240036387A1 (en) * 2021-12-10 2024-02-01 Wuhan China Star Optoelectronics Technology Co., Ltd. Display module and display device

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS54172684U (en) * 1978-05-25 1979-12-06
JPH04306617A (en) * 1991-04-03 1992-10-29 Ricoh Co Ltd Color liquid crystal display device
JP2000258793A (en) * 1999-03-05 2000-09-22 Stanley Electric Co Ltd Reflection liquid crystal display device
JP2003195342A (en) * 2001-12-25 2003-07-09 Optrex Corp Liquid crystal display device

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS54172684U (en) * 1978-05-25 1979-12-06
JPH04306617A (en) * 1991-04-03 1992-10-29 Ricoh Co Ltd Color liquid crystal display device
JP2000258793A (en) * 1999-03-05 2000-09-22 Stanley Electric Co Ltd Reflection liquid crystal display device
JP2003195342A (en) * 2001-12-25 2003-07-09 Optrex Corp Liquid crystal display device

Cited By (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103293738A (en) * 2012-10-19 2013-09-11 上海天马微电子有限公司 Liquid crystal display device and control method thereof
KR20170078556A (en) * 2015-10-09 2017-07-07 시아오미 아이엔씨. Liquid crystal display assembly and electronic device
JP2017534072A (en) * 2015-10-09 2017-11-16 シャオミ・インコーポレイテッド Liquid crystal display unit and electronic device
KR102036409B1 (en) * 2015-10-09 2019-10-24 시아오미 아이엔씨. Liquid crystal display assembly and electronic device
US10495911B2 (en) 2015-10-09 2019-12-03 Xiaomi Inc. Liquid crystal display assembly and electronic device
US20240036387A1 (en) * 2021-12-10 2024-02-01 Wuhan China Star Optoelectronics Technology Co., Ltd. Display module and display device
US11953777B2 (en) * 2021-12-10 2024-04-09 Wuhan China Star Optoelectronics Technology Co., Ltd. Display module and display device

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR102492566B1 (en) Liquid crystal display device
WO2012004922A1 (en) Liquid-crystal display system and method for controlling a liquid-crystal display system
US7656476B2 (en) Liquid crystal display and method for providing light to liquid crystal panel
JP4539760B2 (en) Electronics
US20030146891A1 (en) Electronic billboard with reflective color liquid crystal displays
TW201243442A (en) Multi-mode liquid crystal display with auxiliary non-display components
US20080117346A1 (en) Dual mode display
WO2011121687A1 (en) Display device, liquid crystal module, and image display system
JP2007094038A (en) Multiple image display device
US20060125982A1 (en) Liquid crystal display
KR102089974B1 (en) Display panel and display apparatus having the same
WO2011125271A1 (en) Display device, liquid crystal module, and image display system
US8264645B2 (en) Transflective display
US6753938B2 (en) Liquid crystal display device using both reflection and transmission
US7764254B2 (en) Electro-optical device and electronic apparatus
KR100385880B1 (en) Method of Driving Liquid Crystal Display
WO2012032745A1 (en) Display device, display panel, display module, image display system, and image display method
JP2004521396A (en) Color liquid crystal display device having electrically switchable color filters
JP2008287068A (en) Display device
WO2020238387A1 (en) Display substrate, display panel and driving method for display panel
CN117420707B (en) Double-sided display device and driving method thereof
JP2009204899A (en) Electrooptical device, elecronic equipment and driving method of electrooptical device
CN113608380B (en) Double-sided display panel, display device and driving method
CN217954879U (en) Liquid crystal display screen for medical CT machine
JP2010181455A (en) Display device and electronic equipment

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 11823225

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 11823225

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP